Chevrolet | 2004 Tahoe | Specifications | Chevrolet 2004 Tahoe Specifications

2004 Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-3
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-9
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-23
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-45
Air Bag Systems
...................................... 1-72
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-87
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-8
Windows ................................................. 2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-20
Mirrors .................................................... 2-42
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-51
HomeLink® Transmitter
............................. 2-53
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-57
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-60
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-61
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-22
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
......... 3-39
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-56
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-76
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
........ 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-55
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-4
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-51
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-52
Four-Wheel Drive
..................................... 5-53
Front Axle
............................................... 5-54
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-55
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-61
Tires
...................................................... 5-62
Appearance Care
................................... 5-102
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-110
Electrical System
.................................... 5-110
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-120
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Index .................................................................1
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, the name
TAHOE and the name SUBURBAN are registered
trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever
it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. C2416 A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you will find
that pictures and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what
is in the manual, and the page number where you will
find it.
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 06/23/03
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
are shown along with the text describing the operation
or information relating to a specific component, control,
message, gage or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols you may find on your vehicle:
v
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
Tahoe
vi
Suburban (Extended Model)
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-3
Manual Seats ................................................1-3
Power Seats ..................................................1-4
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-5
Heated Seats .................................................1-5
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-6
Head Restraints .............................................1-8
Rear Seats .......................................................1-9
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-9
60/40 Split Bench Seat ..................................1-10
50/50 Split Bench Seat ..................................1-12
Bench Seat ..................................................1-16
Bucket Seats ...............................................1-21
Safety Belts ...................................................1-23
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-23
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .........1-27
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-28
Driver Position ..............................................1-28
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-36
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-37
Center Passenger Position .............................1-37
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-39
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ..........................1-42
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-44
Child Restraints .............................................1-45
Older Children ..............................................1-45
Infants and Young Children ............................1-48
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-51
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-54
Top Strap ....................................................1-56
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-57
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-60
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System (Rear) ...............................1-62
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position .........................1-62
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center
Rear Seat Position ....................................1-65
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position ....................................1-67
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ....................................1-68
1-1
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Air Bag Systems ............................................1-72
Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-75
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-77
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-79
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-79
What Will You See After an
Air Bag Inflates? .......................................1-80
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-82
1-2
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-86
Adding Equipment to Your
Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ...........................1-86
Restraint System Check ..................................1-87
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-87
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-88
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
If your vehicle has a manual bucket or a split bench
seat, you can adjust it with this lever located at the front
of the seat.
Lift the lever to unlock the seat. Using your body, slide
the seat to where you want it and release the lever.
Try to move the seat with your body to make sure the
seat is locked into place.
1-3
Power Seats
• Raise or lower the front of the seat cushion by raising
or lowering the forward edge of the horizontal control.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
whole horizontal control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion by raising
or lowering the rear edge of the horizontal control.
• Moving the whole horizontal control up or down
raises or lowers the entire seat cushion.
If your vehicle has power reclining seats, you can use
the vertical control to adjust the angle of the seatback.
Move the reclining front seatback rearward or forward
by moving the control toward the rear or the front of the
vehicle. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-6.
If your vehicle has a power seat, you can adjust it with
these controls located on the outboard sides of the seats.
1-4
Power Lumbar
You can increase or
decrease lumbar support
in an area of the lower
seatback.
To increase support, press and hold the front of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the rear
of the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
You can also reshape the side wing area of the lower
seatback for more lateral support.
To increase support, press and hold the top of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the bottom
of the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat on page 2-61 for more information.
Heated Seats
The buttons used to
control this feature are
located on the front doors.
The engine must be
running for the heated seat
feature to work.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button
with the heated seat symbol. Press the button to
cycle through the temperature settings of high,
medium and low and to turn the heated seat off.
1-5
Indicator lights will glow to designate the level of heat
selected, three for high, two for medium, and one
for low.
Reclining Seatbacks
The low setting warms the seatback and cushion
until the seat temperature is near body temperature.
The medium and high settings heat the seatback
and seat cushion to a slightly higher temperature.
You will be able to feel heat in about two minutes.
To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button with
the heated seatback symbol. An indicator light on the
seatback button will glow to designate that only the
seatback is being heated. Additional presses of
the seatback button will cycle through the heat levels
for the seatback only. Press the horizontal button again
to heat the whole seat.
The heated front seats will shut off automatically when
the ignition is turned off.
To adjust the front seatback, lift the manual lever located
on the outboard side of the seat. Release the lever to
lock the seatback where you want it. Lift the lever again
without pushing on the seatback and the seatback will go
to an upright position.
If your vehicle has power seats with a power recliner,
see Power Seats on page 1-4 for further information on
how to operate the reclining seatback feature.
1-6
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-7
Head Restraints
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
To raise the head restraint pull up on the head restraint.
On some models the head restraints tilt forward and
rearward also.
The rear seat head restraints in your vehicle may be
adjustable. They work the same as the front seat head
restraints, except they do not tilt forward and rearward.
1-8
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Extended models: The passenger’s side of the second
row 60/40 or rear bucket seats has an easy entry
feature. This makes it easy to get in and out of the third
seat, if your vehicle has one.
Entering or Exiting the Third Row Seats
To operate the easy entry seat turn the release lever,
located on the back of the seat upward.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
Tilt the seatback toward the front of the vehicle by
pulling the top of the seat forward. When you do the seat
bottom will release. Pull the seat forward until it stops.
Be sure to return the seat to the passenger position
when finished. Push and pull on the seat to make sure
it is locked in place.
1-9
60/40 Split Bench Seat
Tahoe models: The rear seat may have a 60/40 split
seat which may be folded down to give you more cargo
space.
Extended models: The second row rear seat of
extended models may have a 60/40 split seat.
Either side of the rear seat may be folded down to
provide more cargo space.
Folding the Seatbacks
On Tahoe models the rear seatbacks may be equipped
with rearward folding head restraints. When the
seatback is being folded down, the head restraint will
automatically fold rearward to allow a flat load floor
for cargo or entry to the third row seat (if equipped).
To fold, pull up on the
strap loop at the rear
of the seat cushion. Then,
pull the seat cushion up
and fold it forward.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
Make sure that nothing is under or in front of the seat
and that the head restraints are completely lowered.
1-10
After folding the seat cushion fully forward, pull the
seatback forward and fold the seatback down until
it is flat. If the seatback cannot fold flat because it
interferes with the cushion, try moving the seat forward
and/or bring the front seatback more upright. On the
passenger side of the extended models, the lever at the
base of the seat must be turned rearward to release
the seatback.
To return the seat to the passenger position on a
extended model do the following:
1. Lift the floor load panels and latch them into the
seatback.
2. Lift the seatback up and push rearward all the way.
3. Lower the seat cushion until it latches into
position.
4. Pull forward on the seatback and up on the seat
cushion to make sure the seat is securely in
place.
Make sure that the buckles on the driver’s side seatback
are accessible to the outboard and center occupant
and are not under the seat cushions.
To create a load floor release the panels from the
seatback by pushing forward on the latch. Then fold the
panels back to cover the rear seat footwell area.
On regular models make sure the head restraints are
returned to the upright position.
1-11
50/50 Split Bench Seat
If your vehicle has a 50/50 split bench, the seatback(s)
can be folded and the entire seat(s) tilted or removed
from the vehicles.
Folding the Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
To fold the seatbacks do the following:
• Pull up on the release lever, labeled 1, located on the
rear of the seatback, and push the seatback forward.
• To return the seat to the passenger position, pull up
on the release lever labeled 1 and then pull up on the
seatback until the seatback locks into the upright
position.
Push forward on the seatback to make sure it is locked
into position.
1-12
Tilting the 50/50 Split Bench Seat
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
{CAUTION:
If the support rod isn’t properly engaged, the
folded third row seat could come loose in a
sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury
to people and damage to your vehicle. Always
be sure the support rod is properly engaged
when the third row seat is folded forward.
Once the third seatback has been folded down, the
entire seat can be tilted forward to create a flat
load floor. To do this, do the following:
To return the seat to the seating position do the
following:
1. Enter the rear cargo area of the vehicle.
1. Push forward on the seat and release the support
lock rod.
2. Make sure the head restraints have been lowered
completely.
2. Secure the support rod in its stored position on the
underside of the seat.
3. With the seat folded, unlatch the seat from the floor
by pulling up on the lever located under the
carrying handle at the rear of the seat labeled 2.
3. Lower the seat to the floor and let the seat drop
into place.
4. Lift the rear of the seat up, off the floor. You will not
be able to unlatch the seat from the floor unless the
seatback is folded down.
5. Tilt the seat fully forward and secure it in place
using the support rod located on the underside
of the seat on the passenger’s side. Make sure the
rod pin is fully engaged in the lock.
4. Lift up on the carrying handle to make sure the seat
is locked in place.
5. Return the seatback to the upright position by
pulling up on the release lever labeled 1 before
the back can be folded upright.
6. Pull the seatback forward to make sure it is locked
in place.
6. Push and pull on the seat. Make sure the support
rod is holding it firmly in place. Use the seat in this
position only when necessary for additional
cargo space.
1-13
Removing the 50/50 Split Bench Seat
To remove the 50/50 split bench seat, do the following:
1. Open the rear doors and enter the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Fold the seatback
forward onto the seat
cushion by using
the lever labeled 1.
The seat cannot
be removed unless the
seatback is folded.
3. To unlatch the seat
from the floor, pull up
on the release lever
labeled 2, located at the
rear of the seat, and lift
the rear of the seat up
off the floor.
4. Squeeze the release lever, located in the lower
middle to unlatch the seat from the floor, while
pulling the seat out.
5. While holding the rear of the seat up, roll the seat
out of the vehicle.
1-14
Replacing the 50/50 Split Bench Seat
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To reinstall the 50/50 split bench, do the following:
{CAUTION:
A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
1. While holding the rear of the seat up, slide the front
wheels into the slots on the floor. The front latches
should lock into place. If the latches do not lock,
try tilting the rear of the seats upwards.
2. Once the latches are engaged, let the seat drop
into place. Release the lever labeled 1 to return
the seat to its upright position.
3. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to
the floor.
1-15
Bench Seat
If your vehicle has a full bench seat, the seatback can
be folded and the seat can be tilted or removed from the
vehicle.
Folding the Seatback
To fold the seatback on the bench seat, do the following:
1. Pull up on the release
lever, labeled 1,
located on the rear of
the seatback and
push the seatback
forward.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
2. To return the seat to an upright position, pull up on
the release lever labeled 1 and then pull up on the
seatback until the seatback locks into the upright
position.
Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked
into place.
1-16
Tilting the Bench Seat
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
Once the third seatback has been folded down,
the entire seat can be tilted forward to create a flat load
floor. To do this, do the following:
1. Enter the rear cargo area of the vehicle.
2. Make sure the head restraints have been lowered
completely.
3. With the seat folded,
unlatch the seat from
the floor by pulling
up on the lever located
under the carrying
handle at the rear of
the seat labeled 2.
{CAUTION:
If the support rod isn’t properly engaged, the
folded third row seat could come loose in a
sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury
to people and damage to your vehicle. Always
be sure the support rod is properly engaged
when the third row seat is folded forward.
1-17
4. Lift the rear of the seat up, off the floor. You will not
be able to unlatch the seat from the floor unless the
seatback is folded down.
5. Tilt the seat fully forward and secure it in place
using the support rod located on the underside
of the seat on the passenger’s side. Make sure the
rod pin is fully engaged in the lock.
6. Push and pull on the seat. Make sure the support
rod is holding it firmly in place. Use the seat in this
position only when necessary for additional
cargo space.
To return the seat to the seating position do the
following:
1. Push forward on the seat and release the support
lock rod.
2. Secure the support rod in its stored position on the
underside of the seat.
3. Lower the seat to the floor and let the seat drop
into place.
4. Lift up on the carrying handle to make sure the seat
is locked in place.
5. Return the seatback to the upright position by
pulling up on the release lever labeled 1 before
the back can be folded upright.
6. Pull the seatback forward to make sure it is locked
in place.
1-18
Removing the Bench Seat
To remove the full bench seat, do the following:
1. Open the rear doors and enter the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Fold the seatback
forward onto the seat
cushion by using
the lever labeled 1.
The seat cannot
be removed unless the
seatback is folded.
3. To unlatch the seat
from the floor, pull up
on the release lever
labeled 2, located at the
rear of the seat, and lift
the rear of the seat up
off the floor.
4. Squeeze the release lever, located in the lower
middle to unlatch the seat from the floor while
pulling the seat out.
5. While holding the rear of the seat up, roll the seat
out of the vehicle.
1-19
Replacing the Bench Seat
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To reinstall the full bench seat, do the following:
{CAUTION:
A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
1-20
1. While holding the rear of the seat up, slide the front
wheels into the slots on the floor. The front latches
should lock into place. If the latches do not lock,
try tilting the rear of the seats upwards.
2. Once the latches are engaged, let the seat drop
into place. Release the lever labeled 1 to return
the seat to its upright position.
3. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to
the floor.
Bucket Seats
The seatbacks on the bucket seats may be folded
forward to give you more cargo space.
If your vehicle has bucket seats, the seatbacks can be
reclined and the seats can be folded to give you more
cargo room.
On extended models with rear bucket seats, the head
restraints need to be removed in order to fold the
rear seats. To do this follow these directions:
Reclining the Seatbacks
1. Lift the head restraints up until they stop.
On the extended models with bucket seats, the
seatbacks can be reclined. To adjust the seatback
do the following:
2. Press in the button on the side of the head restraint
guide cap and lift up on the head restraint.
3. Do the same for the other cap.
1. Pull forward the lever located at the base of
the seat.
The head restraint can be removed and stored in the
space provided in the folded up seat cushion.
2. Release the lever to lock the seatback where you
want it. If you pull the lever without pushing on the
seatback, the seatback will go to an upright position.
To fold the seatbacks on the bucket seats, do the
following:
Folding the Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
1. Pull up on the strap
loop located at the
rear of the seat
cushion and pull the
seat cushion up.
Then fold it forward.
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
1-21
2. Pull the seatback
release lever up and
pull the seatback
forward. Then fold it
until it is flat.
If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes with
the cushion, try moving the front seat forward and/or
bringing the front seatback more upright.
Once the seatbacks are folded down, the rear seat
footwell area will be exposed and will have to be
covered by the load floor panel. To create a load floor,
do the following:
1-22
1. Release the panels from the seatbacks by pushing
forward on the latches.
2. Then fold the panels back to cover the rear seat
footwell area.
If you have removed the head restraints to fold the rear
bucket seat, be sure to reinstall them on the seatback
after it has been returned to the normal seating position.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-41.
1-23
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-24
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
1-25
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-26
or the instrument panel...
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be – whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have
to wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be
in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts – not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-27
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident – even one that isn’t your fault – you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-45
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-48. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it
properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-28
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-44.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
1-29
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
1-30
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-31
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A:
1-32
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A:
The belt is over an armrest.
1-33
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A:
1-34
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-35
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both
the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-36
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Center Passenger Position
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-28.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt—except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature
which may turn off the passenger’s frontal air bag. If this
happens unintentionally, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats,
someone can sit in the center positions.
When you sit in the center seating position in the
second row you have a lap-shoulder belt which is
similar to the belt in the rear outside seating positions.
To learn how to wear this belt see “Lap-Shoulder
Belt” under Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-39.
1-37
Lap Belt
When you sit in a center seating position other than in
the second row you have a lap belt.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
A lap safety belt does not have a retractor. To make the
belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
1-38
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the
lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not
long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-44.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.
Rear Seat Passengers
Lap-Shoulder Belt
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts.
1-39
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-44.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-40
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-41
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide and use the safety belt:
1. For the second row, remove the guide from its
storage clip on the trim panel near the side of
the seatback or from the side of the center seat.
For the third row, remove the guide from its storage
clip on the side of the seatback.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-42
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The guide must be on top of the belt.
Second Row Seat
1-43
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
Third Row Seat
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-39.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of
the guides. Make sure you remove the comfort guide
from the belt before you fold a rear seat down
or use an easy-entry seat, if your vehicle has one.
1-44
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q:
A:
What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a seat that
has a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
1-45
Q:
A:
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-46
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
If the child is sitting in the second row center
position, move the child toward the safety
belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that
in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint that belts provide. See Rear Safety
Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults
on page 1-42. If the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face
or neck, you might want to place the child a
seat that has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-47
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
CAUTION:
1-48
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
1-49
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight,
height, and age but also whether or not the
restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle
in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-50
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that’s unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-51
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
1-52
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have
used the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see
out the window.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-53
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
″Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.″ This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
air bag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
CAUTION:
1-54
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal air
bag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an air bag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the air bag is off.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position. The restraints will not work properly.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle – even when no child
is in it.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-55
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints are
designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap be
anchored, do not use the restraint unless it is anchored
properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
1-56
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on
the same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
If you have an adjustable head restraint, route the top
strap under it.
Top Strap Anchor Location
Tahoe/Suburban models without rear seats: Top
strap anchor loops are located at the bottom rear of the
front seat cushion for the right front passenger’s position.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Suburban without Rear Seats
Anchor the top strap to this bracket. Once you have
the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to secure
the child restraint itself.
1-57
Tahoe/Suburban models with rear seats: A child
restraint with a top strap should only be used in
the second or third row. Don’t use a child restraint with
a top strap in the front seat because there’s no place
to anchor the top strap.
An anchor loop bracket for a top strap is located at
the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating
position in the second row, and for the center seating
position in the third row.
Third Row Bench Seat
Suburban Second Row Seat, Bucket Seats Similar
1-58
Tahoe models: A child restraint with a top strap should
only be used in the second or third row. Don’t use a
child restraint with a top strap in the right front
passenger’s position, because there’s no place to
anchor the top strap.
An anchor loop bracket for a top strap is located at the
bottom rear of the seat cushion for the center seating
position in the third row.
Third Row 50/50 Split Bench Seat
Tahoe Second Row Seat
1-59
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors (A) in the center and right side passenger
second row seating positions for bench seats, and the
outboard passenger positions for bucket seats.
1-60
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A, B) and child
restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a
top tether strap (C).
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this
child restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH system has a visible metal anchorage point in
the seat where the seatback meets the seat cushion.
{CAUTION:
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint designed for that system.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
1-61
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-56.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the
top tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
1-62
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-60. See Top Strap
on page 1-56 if the child restraint has one.
There is no top strap anchor at the third row driver side
seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the top
strap be anchored or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-63
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
If you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you
may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-64
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Rear Seat Position
Second Row
The center seat position in the second row has a
lap-shoulder belt which works the same way as the
safety belt in the rear outside seat positions. For
instructions on how to secure a child restraint using a
lap-shoulder belt see Securing a Child Restraint in
a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1-62.
Third Row
The center seat position in the third row has a lap belt.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-60. See Top Strap
on page 1-56 if the child restraint has one.
1-65
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
1-66
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
Don’t use child restraints in this position. The restraints
won’t work properly.
1-67
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
In addition, your vehicle may have the passenger
sensing system. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
air bag when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat
or a small child in a forward-facing child restraint or
booster seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-82 and Passenger Air Bag Status
Indicator on page 3-42 for more information on this
including important safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the air bag deploys.
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-54.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
CAUTION:
1-68
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal air
bag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an air bag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the air bag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
child restraint. See Power Seats on page 1-4 or Manual
Seats on page 1-3.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-60.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. See Top Strap on
page 1-56 if your child restraint has one. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal air
bag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-82.
General Motors recommends that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if the air
bag is off. If your child restraint is forward-facing,
move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the child restraint in this seat. See Power
Seats on page 1-4 or Manual Seats on page 1-3.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag, the off
indicator in the passenger air bag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to
RUN or START. See Passenger Air Bag Status
Indicator on page 3-42.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-69
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-70
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
and the air bag is off, the off indicator will be lit and
stay lit in the inside rearview mirror when the key
is turned to RUN or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint
is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt. You should not be able to pull more
of the belt from the retractor once the lock has
been set.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for
an adult or larger child passenger.
1-71
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag
systems.
Your vehicle has air bags – a frontal air bag for the
driver and another frontal air bag for the right front
passenger. Your vehicle may also have side impact air
bags. Side impact air bags are available for the
driver and right front passenger.
If your vehicle has a side impact air bag for the driver
and/or the right front passenger, the words AIR BAG will
appear on the air bag covering on the side of the
seatback closest to the door.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.
But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag systems:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt – even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work
with safety belts but do not replace them.
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
CAUTION:
1-72
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes,
or in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, frontal air bags may
provide less protection in frontal crashes
than more forceful air bags have provided in
the past.
The side impact air bags for the driver and
right front passenger are designed to inflate
only in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle.
They are not designed to inflate in frontal,
in rollover or in rear crashes.
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward,
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts
help keep you in position for air bag inflation
before and during a crash. Always wear
your safety belt, even with frontal air bags.
The driver should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Front occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly – whether or not there is an air
bag for that person.
1-73
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Older
Children” or “Infants and Young Children.”
1-74
There is an air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the air
bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-42
for more information.
Where Are the Air Bags?
The right front passernger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-75
If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact air bag is
in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-76
If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s side
impact air bag is in the side of the passenger’s
seatback closest to the door.
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering. Don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
Frontal Air Bags
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to
inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air bags,
which adjust the amount of restraint according to crash
severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these air bags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more
severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front
of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move
or deform, the threshold level for the reduced deployment
is about 10 to 16 mph (16 to 25 km/h), and the threshold
level for a full deployment is about 20 to 25 mph
(32 to 40 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however,
with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat
above or below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
1-77
Seat Position Sensors
Air Bag Systems
Vehicles with dual stage air bags are also equipped with
special sensors which enable the sensing system to
monitor the position of both the driver and passenger
front seats. The seat position sensor provides
information which is used to determine if the air bags
should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact
air bags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
Side Impact Air Bags
Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact air
bag. See Air Bag Systems on page 1-72. Side impact air
bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe
side crashes. A side impact air bag will inflate if
the crash severity is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” The threshold level can vary with
specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
1-78
The air bag system is designed to work properly under
a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-Road
Driving with Your Four-Wheel Drive Vehicle in the
Index for tips on off-road driving.
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash.
For both frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator,
which inflates the air bag. The inflator, the air bag and
related hardware are all part of the air bag modules.
Frontal air bag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with side
impact air bags, the air bag modules are located in
the seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right
front passenger’s door.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal air bags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags, and only in moderate to severe
side collisions for vehicles with a driver’s and
right front passenger’s side impact air bag.
1-79
What Will You See After an
Air Bag Inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module will be
hot for a short time. These components include the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal air bag and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal
air bag. For vehicles with side impact air bags, the side
of the seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right
front passenger’s door will be hot. The parts of the bag
that come into contact with you may be warm, but
not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and
dust coming from the vents in the deflated air bags.
Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing
or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
1-80
{CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do
so. If you have breathing problems but can’t get
out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then
get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If
you experience breathing problems following
an air bag deployment, you should seek medical
attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger air bag.
• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your
air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag
system won’t be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include air bag modules
and possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal
sensors which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate and a more severe frontal
impact. Your vehicle is also equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which records
information about the frontal air bag system.
The module records information about the readiness
of the system and when the system commands air
bag inflation. It records the status of the driver’s
safety belt usage in a crash in which the air bag
deploys or a crash in which the air bag nearly
deploys. The module also records speed, engine
rpm, brake and throttle data.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air bag
system won’t work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s air bag, or the air
bag covering on the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag
module in the steering wheel, both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag module
and seatback for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not open
or break the air bag coverings.
1-81
Passenger Sensing System
If your rearview mirror has one of the indicators pictured
in the following illustrations, your vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. The indicator will be visible when you
turn your ignition key to START or RUN. The words ON
and OFF or the symbol for on and off, will be visible on
the rearview mirror during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the word
OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will be
visible. See Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator on
page 3-42. If your rearview mirror does not have either of
the indicators pictured, then your vehicle does not have
the passenger sensing system.
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger
Air Bag Status
Indicator – Canada
1-82
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal air bag under certain
conditions. The driver’s air bag and the side air bags
are not part of the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal air bag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
air bag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal air
bag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an air bag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the air bag is off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the air bag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s frontal air bag, the off indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the air bag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer to
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat
Position on page 1-68.
1-83
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal air
bag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
air bag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the air bag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal air bag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle
who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an air bag
for that person.
1-84
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and then enable the passenger’s air bag.
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the air bag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because
anadult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal air bag. See “Air Bag Readiness
Light” in the Index for more on this, including
important safety information.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or
other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has
the passenger sensing system. See Adding Equipment
to Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-86 for
more information about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion
and seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-85
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There air bag system parts in several places around
your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate while
someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer
and the service manual have information about servicing
your vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a
service manual, see Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 7-11.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close
to an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-86
Adding Equipment to Your
Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the air
bags from working properly?
A:
Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the air bag system
from working properly. Also, the air bag system
may not work properly if you relocate any of the
air bag sensors. If you have any questions
about this, you should contact Customer
Assistance before you modify your vehicle. The
phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my advanced air bag system?
A:
Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the air bag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the driver’s seat), or
the inside rearview mirror can affect the operation
of the advanced air bag system. If you have
questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance
are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-87
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
1-88
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system
earlier in this section.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5
Doors and Locks .............................................2-8
Door Locks ....................................................2-8
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12
Lockout Protection ........................................2-13
Liftgate ........................................................2-13
Windows ........................................................2-15
Manual Windows ..........................................2-16
Power Windows ............................................2-16
Sun Visors ...................................................2-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-18
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-18
Passlock® ....................................................2-20
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-20
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-20
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-21
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-22
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-23
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-23
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-25
Four-Wheel Drive ..........................................2-28
All-Wheel Drive with Stabilitrak® ......................2-33
Parking Brake ..............................................2-36
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-37
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-39
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-40
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-40
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked .......2-41
Mirrors ...........................................................2-42
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-42
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature
Display ....................................................2-42
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-44
Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-47
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors .........................2-47
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-48
Outside Power Camper-Type Mirror .................2-48
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .....................2-48
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-49
Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors ....................2-50
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-50
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-50
OnStar® System .............................................2-51
HomeLink® Transmitter ...................................2-53
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-53
Storage Areas ................................................2-57
Glove Box ...................................................2-57
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-57
2-2
Front Storage Area .......................................2-57
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-57
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-57
Rear Storage Area ........................................2-59
Convenience Net ..........................................2-59
Cargo Cover ................................................2-59
Sunroof .........................................................2-60
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-61
Memory Seat ...............................................2-61
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The children or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-3
Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and all door
locks as well as the spare
tire hoist lock, if equipped.
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining replacements.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the
GM Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-6. If your vehicle is
equipped with the OnStar® system with an active
subscription and you lock your keys inside the vehicle,
OnStar® may be able to send a command to unlock
your vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-51
for more information.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-5.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m)
away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied
with your vehicle.
UNLOCK: Pressing this button once will unlock the
driver’s door. The parking lamps will flash and the
interior lights will come on. The ground illumination
lamps will come on. Pressing UNLOCK again within
three seconds will cause the remaining doors to unlock.
The parking lamps will flash and the interior lights will
come on.
LOCK: Pressing this button once will lock all of the
doors. Wait one second, then press LOCK again and the
horn will chirp.
Operating the keyless entry transmitter may interact with
the theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-18.
2-5
Remote Alarm
Battery Replacement
When the panic button with the horn symbol on the
keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound
and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to
30 seconds. This can be turned off by pressing the panic
button again, waiting for 30 seconds, or starting the
vehicle.
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
2-6
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter
do the following:
Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the
security method used by this system. The transmitter
does not send the same signal twice to the receiver.
The receiver will not respond to a signal that has been
sent previously. This prevents anyone from recording
and playing back the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons on the transmitter at the same time for
15 seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
1. Insert a dime, or similar object, in the slot between
the covers of the transmitter housing near the key
ring hole. Remove the bottom by twisting the dime.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+) side up.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-7
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-8
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
You can use the keyless entry system, if equipped,
or you can also use your key.
To lock the door from the
inside, slide the lever
rearward. To unlock the
door, slide the lever
forward.
Power Door Locks
If your vehicle is equipped
with power door locks,
press the raised side of the
switch, with the lock
symbol, on either front
door to lock all the doors
at once.
Press the recessed side of the switch with the unlock
symbol, to unlock all the doors at once.
If your vehicle has the delayed locking feature, see
“Delayed Locking” later in this section.
If your vehicle has this
power door lock switch,
press the bottom of
the switch on either front
door to lock all the doors
at once.
Press the top of the switch to unlock all the doors
at once.
The power door locks will operate at any time even
when the ignition is off.
Operating the power locks may interact with the
theft-deterrent system (if equipped). See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-18.
2-9
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the keyless entry transmitter and a door or the liftgate
(if equipped) is open, the delayed locking feature
will delay locking the doors until five seconds after the
last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to
signal that the delayed locking feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the
keyless entry transmitter twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately lock all the doors.
You can turn the delayed locking feature off or back on
again by doing the following:
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch in the
lock position.
2. Press unlock twice on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
power door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following
method.
Programmable Locking Feature
The following is the list of available programming
options:
Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shifted
into gear.
Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
Mode 3: No automatic door locking.
You can also program this feature using the DIC.
See “Delayed Locking” under DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-56.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to lock all the doors when the transmission is
shifted into gear. The following instructions detail how to
program your door locks differently than the factory
setting. Choose one of the three programming options
listed above before entering the program mode.
2-10
To enter the program mode, do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30 second program timer will begin. You are now
ready to program the automatic door locks.
3. Select one of the three programming options listed
previously, and press the lock side of the power door
lock switch to cycle through the lock options. You will
have 30 seconds to begin programming. If you
exceed the 30 second limit, the locks will
automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp
twice to indicate that you have left the program
mode. If this occurs, repeat the procedure beginning
with Step 1 to re-enter the programming mode.
Programmable Unlocking Feature
The following is the list of available programming
options:
Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to unlock the driver’s door once the transmission
is shifted to PARK (P). The following instructions detail
how to program your door locks differently than the
factory setting. Choose one of the four programming
options listed above before entering the program mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN (the locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode). If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming mode,
the current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
2-11
To enter the program mode, do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30-second program timer will begin.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the four programming options
listed previously, and press the unlock side of
the power door lock switch to cycle through the
unlocking options. You will have 30 seconds
to begin programming. If you exceed the 30-second
limit, the locks will automatically lock and unlock
and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you have left the program mode. If this occurs,
repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1
to re-enter the programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock switches
are not pressed while in the programming mode, the
current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
2-12
Rear Door Security Locks
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, you can
lock the rear side doors so they cannot be opened from
the inside by passengers.
This feature is located on
the inside edge of the
rear doors.
To use one of the locks do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. To engage the rear door security locks, move the
lever forward.
3. To disengage the lock, move the lever rearward.
Liftgate
4. Close the door.
5. Do the same thing to the other rear door.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use. If you want to
open the rear door while the security lock is engaged,
unlock the door and open the door from the outside.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door
is open.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
glass, liftgate or rear doors open because
carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your
vehicle. You can not see or smell CO. It can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the liftgate glass, liftgate
or rear doors open or if electrical wiring or
other cable connections must pass through
the seal between the body and the liftgate
glass, liftgate or rear doors:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the
setting on VENT or OUTSIDE AIR. That will
force outside air into your vehicle. See
Climate Control System on page 3-22.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-40.
2-13
Liftgate Glass and Liftgate
Panel Doors
To open a mechanical lock system from the outside,
insert the key into the lock and turn it counterclockwise
to unlock the glass and liftgate.
To open the rear panel doors, you must open the
passenger’s side panel door first. If the door is locked,
insert your door key in the lock and turn it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
The liftgate glass can be opened using the button on
the liftgate after the doors have been unlocked. This can
be done by using either the power door locks or the
remote keyless entry system.
To open the entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the
center of the door.
To lock a power lock system from the outside, insert the
key into the lock button and turn clockwise. All doors will
lock. You may also use the keyless entry system or the
power door locks to lock the liftgate and liftgate glass.
2-14
To open the passenger’s side panel door, pull on the
handle and pull the door open.
To open the driver’s side panel door, first open the
passenger’s side door. Then, pull the handle on the left
door edge out and pull the door open.
To close the doors, close the driver’s side door first.
After securely closing the door, close the passenger’s
side door. Make sure both doors are latched securely.
To lock the rear doors from outside the vehicle, put your
key in the lock and turn it clockwise. If you have
power door locks, you can lock the side doors as well
as the rear doors from inside the vehicle. For more
information, see Power Door Locks on page 2-9 earlier
in this section.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-15
Manual Windows
Turn the hand crank on each door to manually raise or
lower the manual windows.
Power Windows
If you have power windows, the controls are located on
each of the side doors.
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger’s
windows as well. Your power windows will work when
the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or RUN or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See Ignition Positions on page 2-21.
• Pull up the front edge of the switch to raise the
window.
• Press the front edge of the switch to lower the
window.
Express-Down Windows
The driver and front passenger windows have an
express down feature that allows the windows to be
lowered without holding the switch. Press down on
the front edge of the window switch to activate
the express down mode. The express down mode can
be canceled at any time by pulling up on the switch.
To open the window partway, lightly tap the switch until
the window is at the desired position.
2-16
Lock-Out Switch
Sun Visors
If you have power windows, the driver’s door power
window switch has a lock-out feature. The lock-out
switch is located in front of the power window switches.
This feature prevents all passenger windows from
operating, except from the driver’s position, when the
lock-out switch is engaged. To engage the lock-out
feature press the switch, and an indicator light will
illuminate. To disengage the feature, press the switch
again and the indicator light will go off. When the button
is not engaged, the passenger’s power windows
switches will operate.
To block out glare, you can swing down the top and
bottom visors (if equipped). You can also swing
the bottom visor from side-to-side. Your visors may
have an extension that can be pulled out for additional
glare protection.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
If equipped, pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror
cover to turn on the lamps. There is a slide switch
to adjust the brightness of the lamps.
2-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may be equipped with a content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
With this system, the
security light will flash as
you open the door, with the
ignition off, to let you
know that you are
activating the system.
2-18
This message reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security
light should come on and flash. If using the
remote keyless entry transmitter, the door does not
need to be open.
If the delayed locking feature is active, the alarm
will not be activated until all doors are closed
and the security light goes off.
3. Close all doors. The security light will stop flashing
and stay solid. The light should go off after
approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
If a door is opened without the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. Your
vehicle’s headlamps will flash and the horn will sound
for about two minutes, then will turn off to save the
battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate
if you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
switch with the door open, or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that
you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key
if the alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm if the system
has been armed.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door with
the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by
placing the key in the ignition and turning it to START.
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door.
This should set off the alarm.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the horn
works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace
the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-111.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps
do not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by an
authorized service center.
2-19
Passlock®
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Passlock® theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is
turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the
ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes,
wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine. Remember to release the key from
START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock® system is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at
this time. You may also want to check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-111.
See your dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-65 for more information.
2-20
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn the key
to four different positions.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
can not turn it, be sure you are using the correct
key; if so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break the
key or the ignition switch. If none of these works,
then your vehicle needs service.
C (RUN): This is the position for driving.
D (START): This position starts your engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain
features on your vehicle to continue to work up to
10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF.
A (LOCK): This position locks your ignition and
transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature. You will
only be able to remove your key when the ignition is
turned to LOCK.
Your radio, power windows, sunroof (if equipped), and
OnStar® System (if equipped) will work when the ignition
key is in RUN or ACCESSORY. Once the key is
turned from RUN to LOCK, these features will continue
to work for up to 10 minutes or until a door is opened.
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things like
the radio, power windows and the windshield wipers
when the engine is off.
2-21
Starting Your Engine
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0°F or −18°C), do this:
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position – that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
2-22
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, you can
change the position of the throttle and brake pedals.
This feature is designed for shorter drivers, since
the pedals can not move farther away from the standard
position, but can move toward the driver for better
pedal reach.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature to
operate.
The switch used to
adjust the pedals is
located on the driver’s
side door panel.
Engine Coolant Heater
In very cold weather,
0°F (−18°C) or colder,
the engine coolant heater
can help. You’ll get
easier starting and better
fuel economy during
engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater
should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours
prior to starting your
vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
Press the arrow at the end of the switch closest to you
to move the pedals closer to your body. Press the
arrow at the far end of the switch to move the pedals
away from your body.
2-23
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, near the power steering fluid
reservoir.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
2-24
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission
and features an electronic shift position indicator within
the instrument panel cluster. This display must be
powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being
moved out of PARK (P).
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels.
It’s the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-37. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-65.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
CAUTION:
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle
will be free to roll — even if your shift lever
is in PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear, two-wheel high (2H) or four-wheel
high (4H) or four-wheel low (4L) — not in
NEUTRAL. See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-37.
(Continued)
2-25
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-52.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your two-wheel drive vehicle
is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
2-26
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
If you need more power for passing, and you’re:
• Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road driving.
You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3)
or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
Tow/Haul Mode
If you manually select SECOND (2) in a light duty
automatic transmission, the transmission will drive in
second gear. You may use this feature for reducing the
speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start
your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle
is moving forward, the transmission won’t shift into first
gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on
a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tow/Haul mode.
If so, the selector button is located on the end of the
column shift lever. You can use this feature to assist
when towing or hauling a heavy load. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-65 for more information.
On cold days, approximately 32°F (0°C) or colder,
your transmission is designed to shift differently until
the engine reaches normal operating temperature.
This is intended to improve heater performance.
2-27
When Tow/Haul mode is
selected the Tow/Haul
indicator light will
illuminate.
The Tow/Haul mode also interacts with the Autoride™
feature, if your vehicle is so equipped, to enhance
the ride when trailering or with a loaded vehicle.
See Autoride™ on page 4-64.
Four-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read
the part that follows before using four-wheel drive.
See the appropriate text for the transfer case in your
vehicle.
Notice: Driving on pavement in four-wheel drive for
an extended period of time may cause premature
wear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive
in four-wheel drive on pavement for extended
periods of time.
Front Axle Locking Feature
The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when
you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the axle to
lock or unlock is normal.
2-28
Automatic Transfer Case
Use these buttons to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive.
You can choose among four driving settings:
{CAUTION:
h (2HI):
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause
your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is
in PARK (P). You or someone else could be
seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking
brake before placing the transfer case in
NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake on page 2-36.
The transfer case buttons
are located to the left of
the instrument panel
cluster.
This setting is used for driving in most street
and highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged
in two-wheel drive. This setting also provides the
best fuel economy.
AUTO 4WD: This setting is ideal for use when road
conditions are variable. When driving your vehicle
in AUTO 4WD, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle’s power is sent only to the rear wheels.
When the vehicle senses a loss of traction, the system
will automatically engage four-wheel drive. Driving in
this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy
than 2HI.
G (4HI):
Use the 4HI position when you need extra
traction, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most
off-road situations. This setting also engages your front
axle to help drive your vehicle. This is the best setting
to use when plowing snow.
2-29
5(4LO):
This setting also engages your front axle
and delivers extra torque. You may never need this
setting. It sends maximum power to all four wheels.
You might choose 4LO if you are driving off-road in deep
sand, deep mud, deep snow and climbing or descending
steep hills.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause
your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is
in PARK (P). You or someone else could be
seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking
brake before placing the transfer case in
NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake on page 2-36.
NEUTRAL (N): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-55 or Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-55 for more information.
2-30
Indicator lights in the button show which setting you are
in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you
turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do
not come on, you should take your vehicle to your
dealer for service. An indicator light will flash while
shifting the transfer case. It will remain illuminated when
the shift is complete. If for some reason the transfer
case cannot make a requested shift, it will return to the
last chosen setting.
If the SERVICE 4WD message stays on, you should
take your vehicle to your dealer for service. See ″Service
4WD message″ under Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-56.
Shifting into 4HI or AUTO 4WD
Press and release the 4HI or AUTO 4WD button.
This can be done at any speed (except when shifting
from 4LO), and the indicator light will flash while shifting.
It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed.
Shifting into 2HI
Press and release the 2HI button. This can be done at
any speed (except when shifting from 4LO).
Shifting into 4LO
Shifting Out of 4LO
To shift to the 4LO position, the ignition must be in RUN
and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than
3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have
your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
Press and release the 4LO button. You must wait for
the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain
illuminated before shifting your transmission in gear.
To shift from 4LO to 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI your
vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph
(4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and
the ignition in RUN. The preferred method for shifting
out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI,
AUTO 4WD or 2HI button. You must wait for the 4HI,
AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop flashing
and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission
into gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the 4LO indicator light has stopped flashing
could damage the transfer case. To help avoid
damaging your vehicle, always wait for the 4LO
indicator light to stop flashing before shifting
the transmission into gear.
It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit significant
engagment noise and bump when shifting between
4LO and 4HI ranges or from NEUTRAL with the engine
running.
If the 4LO button is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds
the transfer case will shift to 4HI mode.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the 4LO indicator light has stopped flashing
could damage the transfer case. To help avoid
damaging your vehicle, always wait for the 4LO
indicator light to stop flashing before shifting
the transmission into gear.
It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit significant
engagment noise and bump when shifting between
4LO and 4HI ranges or from NEUTRAL with the engine
running.
If the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch is pressed when
your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI,
AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light will flash for
30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and
the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
2-31
Shifting into NEUTRAL
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the following:
To shift out of NEUTRAL:
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roll.
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal.
2. Set the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn the
ignition to RUN with the engine off.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.
4. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.
5. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
6. Shift the transfer case to 2HI.
7. Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LO
buttons for 10 seconds. The red NEUTRAL light
will come on when the transfer case shift to
NEUTRAL is complete.
8. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one
second, then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D)
for one second.
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
10. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
11. Release the parking brake prior to towing.
2-32
3. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift
position (2HI, 4HI, AUTO 4WD OR 4LO).
4. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL
the red light will go out.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. You may start the engine and shift the transmission
to the desired position.
Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of the
different modes may cause the transfer case to enter the
shift protection mode. This will protect the transfer case
from possible damage and will only allow the transfer
case to respond to one shift per 10 seconds. The transfer
case may stay in this mode for up to three minutes.
All-Wheel Drive with Stabilitrak®
You can choose among three driving settings:
With this feature, engine power is sent to all four wheels
all the time.
d (Stabilitrak®):
This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate
lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle.
It is fully automatic, and adjust itself as needed for road
conditions.
The transfer case buttons
are located to the left of
the instrument panel
cluster.
This button is used with the
Stabilitrak® system and is also used to shift the transfer
case into Neutral (N). For more information on using
Stabilitrak® see Stabilitrak® System on page 4-12.
f (All-Wheel Drive):
This setting delivers power to
all four wheels as needed depending on road and driving
conditions.
g (4LO):
This setting delivers extra torque. You may
never need this setting. It sends maximum power to
all four wheels. You might choose 4LO if you are driving
off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow and
climbing or descending steep hills.
Use these buttons to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive.
2-33
Shifting into 4LO
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause
your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is
in PARK (P). You or someone else could be
seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking
brake before placing the transfer case in
NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake on page 2-36.
NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-55 or Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-55 for more information.
Indicator lights in the buttons show which setting you
are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you
turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights
do not come on, you should take your vehicle to your
dealer for service. An indicator light will flash while
shifting the transfer case. It will remain illuminated when
the shift is complete. If for some reason the transfer
case cannot make a requested shift, it will return to the
last chosen setting.
If the SERVICE 4WD message stays on, you should take
your vehicle to your dealer for service. See SERVICE
4WD under Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-56.
2-34
To shift to the 4LO position, the ignition must be in RUN
and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than
3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have
your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
Press and release the 4LO switch. You must wait for
the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain
illuminated before shifting your transmission in gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the 4LO indicator light has stopped flashing
could damage the transfer case. To help avoid
damaging your vehicle, always wait for the 4LO
indicator light to stop flashing before shifting
the transmission into gear.
If the 4LO button is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds
the transfer case will return to the setting last chosen.
When in 4LO, the vehicle stability is disabled. For more
information see Stabilitrak® System on page 4-12.
Shifting Out of 4LO
To shift from 4LO to All-Wheel Drive your vehicle must
be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h)
with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition
in RUN. The preferred method for shifting out of
4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the All-Wheel Drive
button. You must wait for the AWD indicator light to
stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your
transmission into gear.
If the All-Wheel Drive button is pressed when your
vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the All-Wheel Drive
indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not
complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less
than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the transmission is in
NEUTRAL (N).
Shifting into NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the following:
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roll.
7. Simultaneously press and hold the Stabilitrak® and
4LO buttons for 10 seconds. The red NEUTRAL
light will come on when the transfer case shift
to NEUTRAL is complete.
8. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one
second, then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D)
for one second.
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
10. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
11. Release the parking brake prior to towing.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift out of NEUTRAL:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn the
ignition to RUN with the engine off.
3. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift
position (All-Wheel Drive or 4LO).
2. Set the parking brake.
4. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL
the red light will go out.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.
5. Release the parking brake.
4. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.
6. You may start the engine and shift the transmission
to the desired position.
5. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
6. Shift the transfer case to All-Wheel Drive.
2-35
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
A chime will activate and the warning light will flash
when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle
is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least
three seconds.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, with the parking
brake symbol, to release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-65.
2-36
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. With
four-wheel drive, if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in NEUTRAL. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-65.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position
like this:
• Pull the shift lever toward you.
2-37
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{CAUTION:
• Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear – not in
NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-38
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle could
move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer
case is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to
roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So
be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear – not
in NEUTRAL.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Don’t leave your
vehicle with the engine running unless you
have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called ″torque lock.″
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into
Park (P) on page 2-37.
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system which locks the shift lever in PARK when
the ignition is in the LOCK position. You have to fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 2-25.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift
out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to ACCESSORY. There is no shift
interlock in this key position.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the gear
you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-39
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
2-40
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can not see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-40.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-48.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case
in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
NEUTRAL. Always set your parking brake.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will
not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-37.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-65.
2-41
Mirrors
Temperature and Compass Display
Manual Rearview Mirror
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to
turn the compass/temperature display on or off.
Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare
from headlamps behind you after dark. Push the tab
away from you for normal daytime operation.
If the display reads CAL, you will need to calibrate the
compass. For more information on calibration, see
below.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius do the
following:
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, an
automatic dimming mirror automatically dims to the proper
level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximately
four seconds until either a flashing °F, or °C
appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display to the
desired unit of measurement. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be locked
in and the compass/temperature display will return.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time, please consult your dealer.
Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
the temperature is normal.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper right
corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and the
outside temperature will both appear in the display at the
same time.
P (On/Off):
2-42
This is the on/off button.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned
on automatically each time the ignition is started. To
operate the automatic dimming mirror, do the following:
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to the left
of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not, press and hold the
on/off button for approximately six seconds until the
green light comes on, indicating that the mirror is in
automatic dimming mode.
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function by
pressing and holding the on/off button for
approximately six seconds, until the green indicator
light turns off.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside of zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a
zone number appears in the display. The compass
is now in zone mode.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
zone number appears in the display. Release the
button. After approximately four seconds of
inactivity, the new zone number will be locked in
and the compass/temperature display will return.
4. Calibrate the compass as described below.
2-43
Compass Calibration
Cleaning the Mirror
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds or
until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Passenger Air Bag Indicator
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passenger air bag
indicator, on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
If your vehicle has this feature, the mirror will display the
word ON, or an air bag symbol in Canada, when the
passenger air bag is enabled. For more information,
see Passenger Sensing System on page 1-82.
2-44
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature
Display
If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic mirror,
it will, when on, automatically dim to the proper level to
minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror also includes a display in the upper right
corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and the
outside temperature will both appear in the display at the
same time. The dual display can be turned on or off by
briefly pressing either the TEMP or the COMP button.
Temperature Display
Compass Operation
The temperature can be displayed by pressing the
TEMP button. Pressing the TEMP button once
briefly, will toggle the temperature reading on and off.
To alternate the temperature reading between
Fahrenheit and Celsius, press and hold the TEMP
button for approximately four seconds until the display
blinks °F and °C. Press and release the TEMP button
to toggle between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings.
After approximately four seconds of inactivity, the
display will stop blinking and display the last selection
made.
Press the COMP button once briefly to turn the
compass on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on,
the compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds,
the mirror will display the compass heading.
If an abnormal reading is displayed, for an extended
period of time, please consult your dealer. Under certain
circumstances, a delay in updating the temperature is
normal.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The time period you need to press and hold the
TEMP button to turn the automatic dimming feature on or
off is approximately eight seconds. The indicator light to
the left of the TEMP button will still turn on or off to show
you when the automatic dimming feature is activated.
Once the mirror is turned off, it will remain off until it is
turned back on, or until the vehicle is restarted.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
• After approximately five seconds, the display
does not show a compass heading (N for North,
for example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference
may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount,
magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
in the COMP button for approximately eight seconds
or until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at five mph (8 km/h) or less until the
display reads a direction.
2-45
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for five seconds
until a zone number appears in the display.
3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button, the display
will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
2-46
Passenger Air Bag Indicator
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors
Your mirror may be equipped with a passenger air bag
indicator on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
If you have this feature the mirror will display the
word ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada, when the
passenger air bag is enabled. For more information
see Passenger Sensing System on page 1-82.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Outside Manual Mirrors
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side of
your vehicle and have a clear view of objects behind you.
The mirrors can be folded in to enter narrow areas.
If your vehicle is equipped with camper-type mirrors,
they can be adjusted so you can have a clear view
of the objects behind you.
Pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility
when towing a trailer.
The use of hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on
convex mirror attachments may adversely affect mirror
performance.
2-47
Outside Power Mirrors
If your vehicle is equipped
with power outside mirrors,
the controls are located
on the driver’s door
armrest.
Move the selector switch located above the control pad
to the left or right to choose the mirror you want to
adjust, then press the dots located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror.
The mirrors also include a memory function which works
in conjunction with the memory seats. See “Memory
Seats” in the Index for more information.
2-48
Outside Power Camper-Type Mirror
If your vehicle is equipped with outside power
camper-type mirrors, they can be adjusted so you
can have a clear view of objects behind you.
To extend the mirrors move the selector switch,
located above the mirror control, to the middle position.
The mirror control will illuminate. Press the left side
of the mirror control to slide the mirror heads away from
the body of the vehicle. Press the right side of the
mirror control to slide the mirror heads toward the body
of the vehicle.
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
If your vehicle is equipped
with this feature, the
controls are located on the
driver’s door armrest.
Move the upper selector switch to the left or right to
choose the mirror you want to adjust; then press
the dots located on the four-way control pad to adjust
the mirror.
The mirrors may also include a memory function
which works in conjunction with the memory seats.
See “Memory Seats” under Memory Seat on page 2-61
for more information.
To fold or unfold the mirrors, move the selector switch,
located about the mirror control, to the middle
position. The mirror control will illuminate. Press the
right or left side of the mirror control to fold or unfold the
mirrors. You may notice the mirror glass adjust as the
mirrors fold in; this is normal. The mirror glass will
reposition itself once the mirrors are unfolded.
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,
they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds
and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this
happens, you will need to reset the mirrors.
See “Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors” next.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors if the
following occurs:
• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and unfold
then at least three times using the mirror controls.
This will reset them to their normal detent position.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, the
driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of
headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by
the on and off settings found on the electrochromic
mirror. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display on page 2-44.
2-49
Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
If your vehicle has the optional memory package
you may have this feature.
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from
the driver’s seat.
The vehicle’s mirrors are capable of performing the curb
view assist mirror function. This feature will cause the
passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a preselected
position when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). This
feature may be useful in allowing you to view the curb
when you are parallel parking. When the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE (R) and a short delay has
occurred, the passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror
will return to its original position.
To change the preselected tilt position, adjust the
mirrors to the desired position while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R), this new position is saved in memory
as the tilt position.
You may be able to enable/disable this feature through
the Driver Information Center. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-56.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Outside Heated Mirrors
The outside rearview mirrors with this option have a
defrost mode.
To turn on the defrost feature, press the rear window
defogger button. See “Rear Window Defogger” under
Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-27
for further information.
2-50
OnStar® System
A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required
prior to delivery of OnStar® services and prepaid
calling minutes are also required for OnStar® Personal
Calling and OnStar® Virtual Advisor use. Terms and
conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be
found at www.onstar.com.
OnStar® Services
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and state of
the art call centers to provide you with a wide range of
safety, security, information and convenience services.
®
A complete OnStar user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in your OnStar®-equipped
vehicle’s glove box literature. For more information, visit
www.onstar.com, contact OnStar® at 1−888−4−ONSTAR
(1−888−466−7827), or press the blue OnStar® button to
speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week.
One of the following plans is normally included for a
specific duration with each vehicle equipped with
OnStar®. You can upgrade or extend your OnStar®
service plan to meet your needs.
Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
2-51
Directions and Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan services
• Route Support
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
Luxury and Leisure Plan
• All Directions and Connections Plan services
• Personal Concierge
®
OnStar Personal Calling
With OnStar® Personal Calling, you have a safer way to
stay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free wireless
phone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You can place
calls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with no
contracts and no additional roaming charges. To find out
more about OnStar® Personal Calling, refer to the
OnStar® owner’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box, or
call OnStar® at 1−888−4−ONSTAR (1−888−466−7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
With OnStar® Virtual Advisor you can listen to your
favorite news, entertainment and information topics,
such as traffic and weather reports, stock quotes
and sports scores. You listen to your e-mail through
your vehicle’s speakers, and reply with your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
g: If your vehicle is
equipped with the steering
wheel control buttons you
can use them to interact
with the OnStar® system.
See the OnStar® manual provided with your vehicle for
more information.
2-52
HomeLink® Transmitter
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
HomeLink® a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink® information can be found on the internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Programming the HomeLink®
Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be
sure to follow steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
2-53
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased for
security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink® Buttons”
or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on the internet at:
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
2-54
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and
released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
“time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLink®” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
been successfully accepted by HomeLink®. The
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink®”
to complete.
2-55
Using HomeLink®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for at
least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than
30 seconds.
HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button” next.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
Button
To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink®.”
Resetting Defaults
To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
2-56
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area
Glove Box
Your vehicle may be equipped with a console
compartment between the bucket seats.
To open your glove box, lift up the latch and pull the
door open.
To open it, press the button and swing the console
lid open.
The console has a place to store coins.
Cupholder(s)
Your console has a cupholder that swings down for
the rear seat passengers to use.
Your vehicle may have cupholders located in the front
and rear floor console or in the fold down armrest, and in
the quarter trim.
Luggage Carrier
Front Storage Area
Your vehicle may be equipped with a center armrest
storage compartment in the front bench seat.
To open it, fold down the armrest and press the latch
handle located at the front of the armrest. Then, let the
lid pop up and swing open.
The storage compartment may have a cassette/compact
disc holder.
If you have the luggage carrier, you can load things on
top of your vehicle.
The luggage carrier has slats and siderails attached to
the roof and crossrails which can be moved back
and forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load to the
siderails or siderail supports.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 200 lbs. (918 kg) or hangs
over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage
your vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side
rails, making sure to fasten it securely.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see ″Loading Your Vehicle″.
2-57
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re leaving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage and
cargo are still securely fastened.
Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) located above the glass or above the rear
load doors.
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, care
should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit.
• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, place
the load in the area over the rear wheels (behind
the rear side door on Suburban Models). If you
need to, cut a piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside
the crossrails and siderails to spread the load.
If plywood is used, tie it to the siderail supports.
• Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports.
Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding.
To move the crossrails, pull out on the latch release
handle at each end. Slide the crossrail to the desired
position balancing the force side to side. Push the
release handle back into the latched position and
slide the crossrail back and forth slightly to be sure
the latch snaps securely into place.
• If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails
as far apart as they will go. Tie the load to the
crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports.
Also tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load
so tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged.
• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely locked
into the siderail.
2-58
If your vehicle has the Z71 option your vehicle’s
luggage carrier has a roller crossrail at the rear of
the vehicle.
To load cargo, place cargo on the roller and roll the
cargo forward onto the two front crossrails.
To move the crossrails do the following:
1. Loosen the thumbscrew at each end.
2. Move crossrail to desired position.
3. Tighten the thumbscrews.
Make sure the crossrail is secured.
Rear Storage Area
Cargo Cover
Your vehicle may have a storage compartment located
in the rear cargo area of the vehicle in the driver’s
side trim panel.
Cargo Tie Downs
To open the utility compartment, press in on the release
latch and swing the compartment door open.
To open the Suburban compartment, pull the latch
to access.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may be
equipped with cargo tie
downs in the rear
cargo area that allow you
to strap cargo in and
keep it from moving inside
the vehicle.
You may have a convenience net in the rear of your
vehicle to help keep small loads, like grocery bags,
in place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts.
The net is not designed for larger, heavier items.
To install the net, attach the hooks to the raised cargo
tie downs. Then, attach the cord loops to the button
retainers in the side trim.
When not using the tie downs, flip them down out of
the way.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you’re not using it.
2-59
Sunroof
The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which
you can pull forward to block sun rays. The sunshade
will not close when the sunroof is open.
If a hand, arm, or other object is blocking the sunroof
glass panel as it is closing, the glass panel will stop
at the obstruction. After the obstruction is removed,
the glass panel can be closed or opened.
Use care not to leave the sunroof open for long periods
of time as debris may collect in the tracts.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close your sunroof, the ignition or
RAP needs to be active. See “Retained Accessory
Power” (RAP), under Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle.
Press and release the rear side of the button located in
the front overhead console to express-open the glass
panel and sunshade. To close the glass panel,
press and hold the front of the button. The glass will not
be fully seated unless the button is held until the
glass stops moving. With the sunroof closed, press the
forward side of the button to open the sunroof to the
vent position.
2-60
If the battery has been recharged, disconnected or is
not working, you may need to reprogram the sunroof.
To do this, start the vehicle and press the forward
side of the sunroof switch until the glass panel moves to
a fully closed position. Release, and press again to
move to the vent position which occurs when the sunroof
is fully tilted rearward. This will reset the memory and
enable the sunroof to function properly.
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat
If your vehicle has this
feature, then the controls
for the memory function
are located on the
driver’s door.
These buttons are used to program and recall
memory settings for the driver’s seat, throttle and
brake pedals, both the driver’s and passenger’s
outside mirror, and the radio station presets.
The settings for these features can be personalized
for both driver 1 and driver 2. Driver 1 or driver 2
corresponds to the memory buttons labeled 1and 2
on the driver’s door.
To store your memory seat, throttle and brake pedals,
mirrors and radio presets, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat (including the seatback
recliner, lumbar, and side wing area), throttle
and brake pedals, both of the outside mirrors, and
the radio station presets to your preference.
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 (for driver 1or 2) button
of the memory control for three seconds. A double
chime will sound to let you know that the position
has been stored.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while
the vehicle is in PARK (P), a single chime will sound and
the memory position will be recalled.
2-61
If you use the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter to enter your vehicle, the preset driver’s
seat, throttle and brake pedal, mirror positions and the
radio station presets will be recalled if programmed
to do so through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
The numbers on the back of the transmitters, 1 or 2,
correspond to the numbers on the memory controls.
The seat, throttle and brake pedals and mirror positions
can also be recalled when placing the key in the
ignition if programmed to do so through the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
any time, press one of the memory buttons or power
seat controls.
Easy Exit Seat
The controls for this memory function are located on the
driver’s door.
B This button is used to program and recall the
desired driver’s seat position when exiting/entering the
vehicle. The seat position, can be personalized for
both driver 1 and driver 2.
To store the seat exit position for driver 1 or 2, do the
following:
1. Select the desired driver number by pressing and
releasing the 1 or 2 button. The seat will move to
the stored memory position.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the exit button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will sound
to let you know that the position has been stored
for the identified driver (1 or 2).
To use the seat exit position, do one of the following:
• Press the exit button on the memory control.
• Or, if this feature is enabled (active) in the DIC,
then removing the key from the ignition will
cause the seat to move to the exit position.
2-62
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-7
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-14
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-19
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-21
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-21
Climate Controls ............................................3-22
Climate Control System .................................3-22
Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-23
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-27
Rear Air Conditioning System .........................3-34
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System .......3-35
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System
and Electronic Climate Controls ...................3-37
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3-39
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators .............3-39
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-40
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-41
Tachometer .................................................3-41
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-41
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-42
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator .................3-42
Battery Warning Light ....................................3-44
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-44
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-45
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-46
Traction Off Light ..........................................3-46
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-47
Transmission Temperature Gage .....................3-48
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-49
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-50
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-53
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-54
Four-Wheel-Drive Light ..................................3-54
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................3-54
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-55
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-55
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-56
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-56
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-68
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Audio System(s) .............................................3-76
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS) ........................3-77
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS) ........................3-77
AM-FM Radio ...............................................3-78
Radio with CD ..............................................3-81
Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-92
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................3-108
Rear Seat Entertainment System ...................3-123
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................3-135
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-137
3-2
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-137
DVD Distortion ............................................3-138
Radio Reception .........................................3-138
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ...............3-138
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................3-139
Care of Your CD and DVD Player .................3-140
Cleaning the Video Screen ...........................3-140
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................3-140
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System
(48 Contiguous US States) ........................3-140
Chime Level Adjustment ...............................3-140
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
A. Dome Lamp Override Button. See “Dome Lamps”
under Interior Lamps on page 3-19.
B. Exterior Lamp Controls. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-14.
C. Air Outlets. See “Climate Controls” in Section 3.
D. Automatic Transfer Case/Stabilitrak® Mode Button
(AWD Vehicles)/Traction Assist System (TAS).
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28.
E. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
F. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-40.
G. Gearshift Lever. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-25.
H. Tow/Haul Selector Button (If Equipped). See
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-25.
I. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-76.
J. Comfort Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-22.
K. Instrument Panel Fuse Block. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-111.
L. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
M. Steering Wheel Control Buttons (If Equipped).
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-56.
N. Center Instrument Panel Utility Block. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-111.
O. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-7.
P. Parking Brake Release. See Parking Brake on
page 2-36.
Q. Lighter and Accessory Power Outlets. See
Accessory Power Outlets on page 3-21.
R. Storage Area (If Equipped). See “Storage Areas”
in Section 2.
S. Ashtray. See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter on
page 3-21.
T. Glovebox. See Glove Box on page 2-57.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning
flasher is located at the top
of the steering column.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
3-6
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to
warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about
300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
Horn
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the
steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel
If your vehicle is equipped with a tilt wheel, it will allow
you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive.
You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs
more room when you exit and enter your vehicle.
The tilt steering wheel
lever is located on the
lower left side of the
column.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Turn and Lane Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
For information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 3-14.
3-7
Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers won’t see your
turn signal.
3-8
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-111.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will
also appear in the DIC. To turn the chime and message
off, move the turn signal lever to the off position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):
To change the headlamps from low to high beam,
push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return
to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
8(Mist):
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go.
The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want
more wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
N(Delay):
You can set the wiper speed for a long or
short delay between wipes. This can be very useful
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter
the delay.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings. For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the delay
settings. To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
1 (High Speed):
For high-speed wiping, turn
the band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
9(Off):
To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
3-9
Windshield Washer
Rear Window Washer/Wiper
This knob is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
L(Washer Fluid):
There is a paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push
the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then
either stop or return to your preset speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob to either 1 or 2.
For long delayed wiping, turn the knob to 1. For short
delayed wiping, turn the knob to 2
9(Off): To turn the wiper off, turn the knob to this
symbol.
=(Washer Fluid):
To wash the window, press the
knob with this symbol.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
windows, check the fluid level.
3-10
Cruise Control
9(Off): This position
turns the system off.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
R(On):
This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
T(Set):
Press this button to set the speed.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can not drive safely at a steady speed. So,
do not use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
3-11
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise symbol on the
instrument panel will
illuminate when the cruise
control is engaged.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on
to resume/accelerate.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster,
don’t hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
3-12
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Press the set button at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. If the
accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds,
cruise control will turn off.
• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/accelerate.
Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want,
and then release the switch. To increase your speed
in very small amounts, move the switch briefly to
resume/accelerate. Each time you do this, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control.
Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t
use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are four ways to turn off the cruise control:
•
•
•
•
Step lightly on the brake pedal,
move the cruise control switch to off, or
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
If your vehicle has the Stabilitrak® feature, cruise
control will turn off if road conditions cause
Stabilitrak® to activate.
• If the accelerator pedal is held for 60 seconds or
longer, cruise control will turn off.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-13
Exterior Lamps
AUTO (Automatic): Turning the control to this position
puts the system into automatic headlamp mode.
; (Parking Lamps): Turning the control to this
position turns on the parking lamps, together with the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Roof Marker Lamps (If Equipped)
5 (Headlamps):
Turning the control to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
The control on the driver’s side of your instrument panel
operates the exterior lamps.
Turn the control clockwise to operate the lamps.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
9 (Off): Turning the control to this position turns off
the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and the automatic
headlamps.
3-14
You can switch your headlamps from high to low-beam
by pushing the turn signal/high-beam lever towards
the instrument panel.
A circuit breaker protects your headlamps. If you have
an electrical overload, your headlamps will flicker on and
off. Have your headlamp wiring checked right away if
this happens.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor located
on the top of the instrument panel in the defroster grille.
Be sure it is not covered, or the system will be on
whenever the ignition is on.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once you
leave the garage, it will take approximately one minute
for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL
if it is bright enough outside. During that delay, your
instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual.
Make sure your instrument panel brightness control is in
the full bright position. See “Instrument Panel Brightness
Control” under Interior Lamps on page 3-19.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, turn the control to the off position.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
You may be able to turn off your Automatic Headlamp
System. See ″Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)″ later
in this section for more information.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
Your headlamps will also stay on after you exit the
vehicle. You can program this feature using the Driver
Information Center. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-56.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need them.
3-15
Lamps On Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps
or parking lamps are manually turned on and your
ignition is off, in LOCK, ACCESSORY, or your door
is open. To disable the chime, turn the light off then
back on.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
•
•
•
•
The ignition is on
The exterior lamps control is AUTO
The automatic transmission is not in PARK (P)
The light sensor determines it is daytime
3-16
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps or the last
chosen headlamp setting that was used.
When you turn the headlamp switch off, the headlamps
will go off, and your DRL lamps will illuminate,
provided it is not dark outside.
Shifting the transmission into PARK (P) will allow you to
idle the vehicle with the DRL off. The DRL will stay
off until you shift the transmission out of PARK (P).
This procedure applies only to vehicles first sold in the
United States.
Fog Lamps
If your vehicle has fog lamps, use them for better vision
in foggy or misty conditions.
The fog lamp button is
located on the left side of
the instrument panel.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. Press the
button again to turn them off. An indicator light will glow
in the button when the fog lamps are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps
in the dark without turning on your headlamps.
The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off,
the fog lamps will come on again.
The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is
turned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after you
restart the vehicle, you will need to press the fog lamp
button again.
Your parking lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must
be on for your fog lamps to work.
3-17
Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp Switch
If your vehicle has this feature, this switch includes
wiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified service
center to install an auxiliary roof lamp.
This switch is located on
the center of the instrument
panel near the comfort
controls.
3-18
When the switch wiring is connected to an auxiliary
roof mounted lamp, pressing the switch will activate
the lamp and illuminate an indicator light near the
switch. Pressing the switch again will turn off the
roof mounted lamp.
Interior Lamps
Entry Lighting
Instrument Panel Brightness
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry feature.
D:
This feature controls the brightness of the
instrument panel lights.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come
on if the dome override button is in the out position.
If the dome override button is pressed in, the lamps
will not come on.
The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to the
headlamp control.
Front Reading Lamps
Turn the thumbwheel up to adjust the instrument panel
lights. Turn the thumbwheel up to return the radio
display to full brightness when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on. To turn on the dome lamps, turn the
thumbwheel all the way up.
The reading lamps are
located on the overhead
console.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. The lights will
not come on if the dome override button is pressed in.
To turn on the reading lamps, press the button
located next to each lamp. To turn them off, press the
button again.
3-19
The lamps can be adjusted to point in the direction
you want.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning
the thumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamps
control, all the way up. In this position, the dome lamps
will remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
E:
Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn the lamps on or off, press the button
located next to the lamp. The lamps are fixed and
cannot be adjusted.
You can use the dome override button, located
below the exterior lamps control, to set the dome lamps
to come on automatically when a door is opened, or
to remain off. To turn the lamps off, press the button into
the in position. With the button in this position, the
dome lamps will remain off when the doors are open.
To return the lamps to automatic operation, press
the button again and return it to the out position.
With the button in this position, the dome lamps will
come on when you open a door.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome,and reading lamps if
they are left on for more than 10 minutes when the
ignition is off. This will keep the battery from
running down.
3-20
Accessory Power Outlets
With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
Your vehicle may have two accessory power outlets,
or may have one accessory power outlet located
near the cigarette lighter, if equipped. The cigarette
lighter is designed to fit only in the receptacle to the
right of the accessory power outlet.
To use the outlet, lift the cover. When not using it,
always close the cover.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the accessory power plugs.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
The front ashtray is located near the center of the
instrument panel or on the front console, if equipped.
Pull on the ashtray door to open it.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
To remove the front ashtray pull the ashtray up.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and
let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating will not allow the lighter to back away
from the heating element when it is hot. Damage
from overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
3-21
Climate Controls
Fan Knob
Climate Control System
The fan knob on the left side of the control panel
adjusts the fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob
clockwise. To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise.
To turn the fan off, turn the knob to the off position.
9 (Off): If the fan is off, outside air will still enter the
vehicle, and will be directed based on the position of
the mode knob. The temperature can also be adjusted
using the temperature knob.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select
the temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area. Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for
warmer air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward
the blue area for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
3-22
H (Vent):
Dual Climate Control System
) (Bi-Level):
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
This setting directs the air through the
instrument panel outlets.
Air is delivered through the floor outlets
as well as the instrument panel outlets. The flow can
be divided between vent and floor outlets depending
upon where the knob is placed between the settings.
6 (Floor):
This setting directs most of the air through
the floor outlets, and the rest of the air is divided
between the windshield defroster outlets and the side
window defroster outlets.
W (Defog):
Airflow is delivered through the floor
outlets, the windshield defroster outlets and the side
window defroster outlets. The air flow can be divided
between floor and defrost depending upon where
the knob is placed between the settings.
1 (Defrost):
This setting directs most air through the
windshield defroster outlets, side window defroster
outlets and some through the floor outlets.
9(Fan):
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Turn the knob to the off position to turn off the fan.
If the knob is in off outside air will still enter the vehicle,
and will be directed based on the position of the
mode knob. The temperature can also be adjusted
using the temperature levers.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
3-23
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel vents.
)(Bi-Level):
This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel vents; then directs most of the
remaining air to the floor vents. A little air is directed
toward the windshield and the side window vents.
Cooler air is directed to the upper vents and warmer air
to the floor vents.
The air-conditioning compressor will also come on when
this mode is activated. While in recirculation mode
the windows may fog when the weather is cold
and damp. To clear the fog, select either the blend or
defrost mode and increase fan speed.
Temperature Control
Driver’s Side: The lever on the left side of the climate
control panel is used to raise or lower the temperature on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. This lever also adjusts the
temperature to the center console outlets (if equipped).
6 (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor vents with a little air directed to the windshield and
the side window vents.
Passenger’s Side: The lever on the right side of the
climate control panel is used to raise or lower the
temperature on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
h (Recirculation):
#(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air-conditioning system on or off. When the button is
pressed, an indicator light will come on and the system
will begin to cool and dehumidify the air inside of your
vehicle. You may notice a slight change in engine
performance when the air conditioning compressor
shuts off and turns on again. This is normal.
The recirculation mode is used
to recirculate the air inside of your vehicle. Use this
mode to help prevent outside odors and/or dust
from entering your vehicle or to help cool the air inside
of your vehicle more quickly. Press this button to
turn the recirculation mode on or off. The light on the
recirculation button will illuminate. Recirculation cannot
be used in floor, blend or defrost modes. An indicator
on the button will light up, flash three times and turn off
when recirculation is selected in these modes.
3-24
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to choose
from to clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use the
defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture
and warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode
to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
select one of the following modes:
The rear window defogger will automatically turn off
several minutes after the button is pressed. Pressing the
button while the defogger is running can also turn off
the defogger.
-(Defog): This mode directs the air to the floor
outlets, windshield and the side window vents.
The air conditioning compressor will run automatically
to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in
the defog mode.
1(Defrost):
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the side window vents, with only a
little air directed to the floor vents. The air conditioning
compressor will run automatically to dehumidify the
air to prevent window fogging. The recirculation mode
cannot be selected while in defrost mode.
< (Rear):
Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this
button will activate them.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-25
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located
in the center and on the
side of your instrument
panel to direct the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, etc., may affect
the performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the
direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle.
Move the louvers up or down. Use the thumbwheel
next to or underneath the outlet to close the louvers.
For the most efficient airflow and temperature control,
keep the outlet in the fully opened position.
Rear seat outlets can be used to adjust airflow toward
either seating area, the floor or upward. Move the center
louvers up or down to direct the airflow.
3-26
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
will always flow through the system as the vehicle is
moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
With this system, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has a
flow-through ventilation system described later in this
section.
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or
increase the cabin temperature. The display will show
the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an
arrow pointing to the driver will be displayed under
and to the left of the temperature setting.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob
The passenger’s side knob can be used to change
the temperature of the air coming through the system
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The temperature
can be adjusted even if the system is turned off.
This is possible since outside air will always flow through
the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it
is set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in
this section.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or
increase the cabin temperature. The display will show
the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and
an arrow pointing to the passenger will be displayed
under and to the right of the temperature setting.
The driver’s side knob is used to adjust the temperature
of the air coming through the system on the driver’s
side. The temperature can be adjusted even if the
system is turned off. This is possible since outside air
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to
match the driver’s temperature setting by pressing and
holding the AUTO button for four seconds. Both the
driver and passenger arrows will be displayed.
You can select different climate control settings for the
driver and passengers.
3-27
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system will control the inside temperature,
the air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
show the current driver’s set temperature, delivery
mode and fan speed. Press the AUTO button again
within five seconds to display the passenger’s set
temperature.
If the driver and passenger’s temperature settings
are not the same, the opposite side temperature
setting will be displayed for an additional five
seconds. To make the passenger’s temperature the
same as the driver’s press and hold the AUTO
button for about four seconds.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will run
when the outside temperature is over about
40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set to
outside air. If it’s hot outside, the air inlet may
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help
quickly cool down your vehicle. The light on the
button will illuminate in recirculation.
3-28
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Turn the driver’s or
passenger’s side temperature knob to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
temperature setting of 60°F (15°C) the system
will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C)
the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the
top of the instrument panel near the windshield.
This sensor regulates air temperature based on
sun load, and also turns on your headlamps.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the engine coolant
temperature. Pressing the fan switch will override this
delay and change the fan to a selected speed.
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and
will be directed to the floor. This direction can be changed
by pressing the mode button. The temperature can also
be adjusted using either temperature knob. Press the up
or down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button, the
AUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn the
system on when it is off.
Manual Operation
)(Bi-Level):
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or
fan speed.
6 (Floor):
w9x (Fan):
outlets.
The switch with the fan symbol allows
you to manually adjust the fan speed. Press the up
arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow
to decrease fan speed.
Pressing this button when the system is off will turn the
system on.
C (Mode): Press this button to manually change the
direction of the airflow in your vehicle; keep pressing the
button until the desired mode appears on the display.
If you press the mode button to select an air delivery
mode, the display will change to show you the selected
air mode delivery. The display will then show the
current status of the system. When the system is turned
off, the display will go blank after displaying the
current status of the system.
H (Panel):
panel outlets.
This setting will deliver air to the instrument
This setting will deliver warmer air to the
floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.
- (Defog):
This setting will deliver air to the floor
See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in
this section.
@(Recirculation):
Press this button to limit the
amount of outside air entering your vehicle. The light on
the recirculation button will glow. This is helpful when
you are trying to limit odors entering your vehicle and for
maximum air conditioning performance in hot weather.
Press this button again to allow outside air to enter
the vehicle. The light on the recirculation button will
go off.
Pressing this button also cancels the auto recirculation
feature. To resume the auto recirculation function,
press the AUTO button. Each time the vehicle is started,
the system will revert to the auto recirculation function.
If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog or
floor, the light in the button will flash and then go out to
let you know that this is not allowed. This is normal
and helps to prevent fogging.
3-29
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the
system in recirculation for extended periods of time may
cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the
fog, select either defog or front defrost.
You may also notice that the A/C compressor will run
while in recirculation mode. This is normal and helps to
prevent fogging.
9(Off):
Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and
will be directed to the floor. This direction can be changed
by pressing the mode button. The temperature can also
be adjusted using either temperature knob. Press the up
or down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button, the
AUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn the
system on when it is off.
Display
If you press the MODE button to select an air delivery
mode, the display will change to show you the selected
air delivery mode. After ten seconds, the display will
change to show the driver temperature setting and the
selected mode.
If you press the up or down arrows on the fan switch,
the display will change to show the selected fan speed.
After ten seconds, the display will change to show
the driver temperature setting and the selected mode.
Whenever you press AUTO, the display will change
to show the following:
• The current driver’s set temperature and an arrow
for five seconds
• The current passenger’s set temperature setting
and an arrow for five seconds
• The automatic air delivery mode and fan speed
If the driver’s and passenger’s temperature settings are
the same when AUTO is pressed, the temperature
setting and both arrows will be displayed for five
seconds along with the automatic air delivery mode and
fan speed. After the five second update, the display
will change to show the temperature setting, both arrows
and AUTO.
3-30
Air Conditioning
#(Air Conditioning):
Press this button to turn
the air conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off.
The snowflake symbol will appear on the display
when the A/C is on.
Pressing this button when the outside temperature is
too cool for air conditioning will make the snowflake
symbol flash three times and then turn off to let
you know the air conditioning mode is not available.
If the air conditioning is on and the outside temperature
drops below a temperature which is too cool for air
conditioning to be effective, the snowflake symbol will
turn off to let you know the air conditioning mode
has been canceled.
^ (Air Conditioning Off):
On some vehicles, when
you turn the air conditioning off, this symbol will appear
on the display. If your vehicle does not have this
symbol, the snowflake symbol will turn off to let you
know the air conditioning is off.
When air conditioning is selected or in AUTO mode,
the system will run the air conditioning automatically
to cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle.
If you select A/C off while in front defrost, defog
or recirculation, the A/C snowflake symbol will turn off,
but the A/C compressor will still run to help prevent
fogging.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for
your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows
closed for the air conditioner to work its best.
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation of
the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm air to
the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.
To warm or cool the air delivered, turn the temperature
knob to the desired setting.
In AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidify
the air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode,
the system will maximize its performance by using
recirculation as necessary.
Heating
On cold days when using manual operation of the
automatic system, choose floor mode to deliver air to
the floor outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered,
turn the temperature knob to the desired setting.
If you want to use the automatic mode, press AUTO
and adjust the temperature by turning the temperature
knob.
The heater works best if you keep the windows closed
while using it.
3-31
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
You can use either defog or front defrost to clear fog or
frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to
clear the windows of fog or moisture. Use the front
defrost button to defrost the front windshield.
If your vehicle has this feature, the lines you see on
the rear window warm the glass. The rear window
defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
-(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of
fog or moisture. Press the mode button to select
this setting. This setting will deliver air to the floor and
windshield outlets.
<(Rear):
0 (Front Defrost):
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed. If you need additional
warming time, press the button again.
Press the front defrost button to
defrost the windshield. The system will automatically
control the fan speed if you select defrost from AUTO
mode. If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or
warmer, your air conditioning compressor will
automatically run to help dehumidify the air and dry
the windshield.
3-32
Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this
button will activate them.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window may damage the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the
rear window with sharp objects.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located
in the center and on the
side of your instrument
panel to direct the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, etc., may affect
the performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the
direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle.
Move the louvers up or down. Use the thumbwheel
next to or underneath the outlet to close the louvers.
For the most efficient airflow and temperature control,
keep the outlet in the fully opened position.
Rear seat outlets can be used to adjust airflow toward
either seating area, the floor or upward. Move the center
louvers up or down to direct the airflow.
3-33
Rear Air Conditioning System
To operate the rear system using the front control,
just turn the knob to the fan position you want.
If your vehicle is equipped with the optional rear air
conditioner it has two rear air conditioning fan speed
selectors. One fan speed selector is located in the
overhead console and the other is located in the
headliner above the second row seats.
Rear Control
To use the rear control, first turn the front control to the
AUX position. Then, the rear control can be used to
increase and decrease the airflow.
Front Control
To increase and decrease the flow of cooled air to the
rear vents, turn the knob to the fan speed you want.
The knob has three speed positions. To increase
the flow of cooled air, turn the knob clockwise. To
decrease the flow of cooled air, turn it counterclockwise.
To turn the fan off, turn the knob to the off position.
3-34
Rear Air Conditioning and
Heating System
If your vehicle is equipped with this system, there are
two rear heat and air conditioning controls. One control
is located in the overhead console and the other is
located in the headliner above the second row seats.
The system can be controlled from the front controls as
well as the rear controls.
Fan Knob
The fan knob on the left side of the control panel
adjusts the fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob
clockwise. To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise.
To turn the fan off, turn the knob to the off position.
9 (Off):
An off setting, located on the front climate
control panel also allows the driver to turn off the
rear seat passenger seat controls from the front seat.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select
the temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area. Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for
warmer air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward
the blue area for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
H (Vent):
Front Control
The front control has three knobs that control airflow
speed, temperature and airflow location.
This setting directs the air through the
headliner outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
Air is delivered through the floor outlets
as well as the headliner outlets. The flow can be
divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon
where the knob is placed between the settings.
6 (Floor):
This setting directs most of the air through
the floor outlets.
3-35
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select
the temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area. Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for
warmer air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward
the blue area for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
Rear Controls
To use the rear control, first turn the front control to the
AUX position. Then, the rear control can be used to
adjust the airflow speed, temperature, and airflow
location.
Fan Knob
The fan knob on the left side of the control panel
adjusts the fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob
clockwise. To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise.
To turn the fan off, turn the knob to the off position.
9(Off): Turn the knob to this position to turn the rear
seat comfort controls on or off.
3-36
H (Vent):
This setting directs the air through the
headliner outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
Air is delivered through the floor outlets
as well as the headliner outlets. The flow can be
divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon
where the knob is placed between the settings.
6 (Floor):
This setting directs most of the air through
the floor outlets.
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System and Electronic Climate
Controls
AUX: Turn the knob, located on the left side of the
control panel, to this position to allow the rear seat
passengers to have control over the rear climate control
system. See “Rear Passenger Console Control” later
for more information.
With this system the front or rear passengers can
control the air temperature, air flow and fan speed for
the rear seat passengers. The climate control has
an overhead control near the driver and a control on
the back of the center console.
9 (Off): Turn the knob, located on the left side of the
control panel, to this position to turn the rear climate
control system off.
Driver Overhead Control
9(Fan):
To adjust the airflow speed, turn the fan
knob located on the left side of the control panel to the
desired setting. Choose AUTO if you want the system
to automatically choose the fan speed to maintain
a selected temperature. See “Auto Mode” later in this
section for more information on using this feature.
°F (°C): To adjust the air temperature, turn the
temperature knob on the center of the control panel.
For cooler or warmer air turn the knob counterclockwise
toward 66°F (19°C) or clockwise toward 82°F (27°C).
Front Controls
To control the rear climate control from the front seat
position, use the driver overhead control. The rear
console control must be on.
To regulate the airflow direction, adjust the right knob
on the control panel. Turn the knob clockwise for
floor vent airflow or counterclockwise for headliner vent
airflow. Generally, the upper vents are used for air
conditioning and the floor vents for heating. The knob
can be set to any blend setting. Choose AUTO if
you want the system to automatically regulate the
airflow. See “Auto Mode” later in this section for more
information on using this feature.
3-37
Rear Passenger Console Control
To control the rear climate control from the rear
passenger seat position, use the rear passenger console
control. The driver overhead control fan knob must be
set to the AUX position.
%(Mode): Press this button to select the air delivery
mode and AUTO mode. Choose AUTO if you want
the system to automatically regulate the airflow.
See “Auto Mode” later in this section for more
information on using this feature.
b (Temperature): Press this button up or down to
increase or decrease the temperature setting.
w9x(Fan):
Press this button up or down to adjust
the fan speed. Choose AUTO if you want the system to
automatically choose the fan speed to maintain a
selected temperature. See “Auto Mode” later in this
section for more information on using this feature.
AUTO Mode
Rear Controls
The rear seat controls have the following settings:
O (On/Off): Press this button to turn the rear seat
comfort controls on or off when the front overhead
control is set to AUX.
3-38
When using the system in auto mode, find your comfort
setting by placing the temperature control to 74°F (23°C)
and allowing about 20 minutes for the system to regulate.
Then adjust the temperature setting as necessary. If you
choose full cold 60° F (15°C), the system will remain at
the maximum cooling setting. If you choose full hot
90 F (32°C), the system will remain at the maximum
heat setting.
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays
on when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section
that tells you what to do about it. Please follow
this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly – and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Your vehicle also has a driver information system
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-56.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine
just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar
with this section, you should not be alarmed when
this happens.
3-39
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States Heavy Duty Transmission version shown. Canada and Light Duty
Transmission Clusters similar.
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and
economically.
3-40
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Trip Odometer
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to
zero.
Press the reset button to toggle between the trip
odometer and the regular odometer. Holding the reset
button for two seconds while the trip odometer is
displayed will reset it.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the reset button.
Engine Hour Meter Display
The odometer can also display the number of hours the
engine has run. To display the hour meter, turn the
ignition off, press and hold the reset button for at least
four seconds. The hour meter will be displayed for
up to 30 seconds, or until the ignition is turned on.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
3-41
Air Bag Readiness Light
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the air bag
sensors, the air bag modules, the passenger sensing
system (if equipped), the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more information on the
air bag system, see Air Bag Systems on page 1-72.
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
your rearview mirror will have a passenger air bag status
indicator.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system is
ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger
Air Bag Status
Indicator – Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,
the passenger air bag status indicator will light ON and
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or
either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
air bag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal air bag is enabled (may inflate).
3-42
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal air bag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
air bag inflates. This is because the back of
the rear-facing child restraint would be very
close to the inflating air bag. Don’t use a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat unless the air bag has been
turned off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the air bag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
air bag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-82
for more on this, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the air bag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the air bag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the frontal air
bag. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the
Index.
3-43
Battery Warning Light
If this light is displayed
when the engine is
running, you may have
a problem with your
charging system.
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition
is in RUN, this gage shows
your battery’s state of
charge in DC volts.
The battery display will also stay on while the key is in
RUN until the engine is started.
If the light stays on after starting the engine it could
indicate a problem with the generator drive belt, or some
other charging system problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving with this light displayed could drain
your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this light
displayed, it helps to turn off all your accessories,
such as the radio and the air conditioner.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between
the low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for
an extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
all unnecessary accessories.
3-44
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will
flash when you set the parking brake. The light will
flash if the parking brake doesn’t release fully. If you try
to drive with the parking brake engaged, a chime will
sound when the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have your brake system
inspected right away.
United States
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal
is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to
the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still
on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-55.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
Canada
3-45
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on for
several seconds.
That’s normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. You will also hear a chime
sound when the light is on steady. If the regular brake
system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but
you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on you don’t have anti-lock
brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes.
In addition to both lights, you will also hear a chime sound
on the first occurrence of a problem and each time the
vehicle is shut off and then restarted. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-45.
3-46
Traction Off Light
If you have the Traction
Assist System, this light
should come on briefly
when you turn the ignition
to RUN.
If the light doesn’t come on then, the system may
require service; have it fixed so it will be there to warn
you if the system is turned off.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
there may be a problem with your Traction Assist
System and your vehicle may need service. When this
light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction off light may come on for the following
reasons:
• If you turn the system off by pressing the TAS
on/off button located to the left of the steering wheel,
the light will come on and stay on. To turn the
system back on, press the button again; the light
should go off.
• If you move the shift lever to FIRST (1), the light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
will come on and stay on to indicate that the
traction system is off. This is normal operation.
To turn the system back on, move the shift lever
back to a position other than FIRST (1); the
light should go off. See Traction Assist System
(TAS) on page 4-9.
• The light will come on and stay on if the TAS
automatic engagement feature has been turned off.
To turn the system on, press the TAS off/on
button; the light should go off. To turn the automatic
engagement feature back on, see Traction Assist
System (TAS) on page 4-9.
• If the Traction Assist System is affected by an
anti-lock brake system, TAS or engine-related
problem, the system will turn off and the light will
come on. Have your vehicle serviced.
• If the vehicle is driven over an extremely rough road,
the system will turn off and the light will come on.
The light will go off a few seconds after the rough
road conditions go away or when the vehicle comes
to a complete stop. This is normal operation.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load
or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the
gage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-29.
3-47
Transmission Temperature Gage
At approximately 265°F (130°C), the message center
will display a TRANSMISSION HOT message and
the transmission will enter a transmission protection
mode. When the transmission enters the protection
mode, you may notice a change in the transmission
shifting patterns. The transmission will return to normal
shifting patterns when the transmission fluid temperature
falls below 260°F (127°C).
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-56 for
further information.
United States
Canada
Your vehicle may be equipped with a transmission
temperature gage.
When your ignition is on, the gage shows the
temperature of the transmission fluid. The normal
operating range is from 100°F (38°C) to about
265°F (130°C).
3-48
If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures of
approximately 275°F (135°C) or greater, the Driver
Information Center will display a TRANS HOT IDLE
ENGINE warning message, and a chime will sound.
Pull the vehicle off the roadway when it is safe to do so.
Set the parking brake, place the transmission in
PARK (P) and allow the engine to idle until the
transmission temperature falls below 260°F (127°C).
If the transmission continues to operate above
265°F (130°C), contact your nearest dealer or the
GM Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-6.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle with the
transmission temperature gage above normal
operating range, you can damage the transmission.
This could lead to costly repairs that would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not drive your
vehicle while the transmission temperature gage
reading is above normal. See your dealer for service.
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tire Pressure Light
If your vehicle is equipped
with the Tire Pressure
Monitor system, this light
will come on if the
system detects low
tire pressure.
Towing a trailer
Hot outside air temperatures
Hauling a large or heavy load
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler (if equipped).
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures
on a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for the proper transmission maintenance
intervals.
A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC message will
accompany the light.
This light will also come on for a bulb check when the
vehicle is started.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-72 for
more information.
For more information on the proper tire pressure,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58. For more
information on your tires, see Tires on page 5-62.
3-49
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board DiagnosticsSecond Generation) and is intended to assure that
emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The Check Engine light comes on to indicate that
there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions
often will be indicated by the system before any
problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
may not be covered by your warranty.
3-50
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it
is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
•
•
•
•
Reducing vehicle speed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
Avoiding hard accelerations.
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-8.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and see your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
3-51
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-4. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
3-52
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
Check Engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Gage
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon
as possible. See Oil Pressure Low under DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-68 and Engine Oil on
page 5-16.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure
in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine
is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
3-53
Cruise Control Light
The cruise light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control. See “Cruise
Control” under Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever
on page 3-7.
Four-Wheel-Drive Light
The four-wheel drive
indicator will light up
when you shift a manual
transfer case into
four-wheel drive and the
front axle engages.
Some delay between shifting and the indicator’s lighting
is normal.
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28 for more
information.
3-54
Tow/Haul Mode Light
This light is displayed
when the Tow/Haul mode
has been activated.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-65.
Fuel Gage
Here are some situations you may experience with your
fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the
ignition.
United States
Canada
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible.
When the fuel tank is low the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will appear. See Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 3-56.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel on
page 5-4.
3-55
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC display is located on the instrument panel
cluster above the steering wheel. The DIC can display
information such as the trip odometer, fuel economy and
personalization features.
C (Personalization): This button will change personal
options available on your vehicle.
D (Select): This button resets certain functions and
turns off or acknowledges messages on the DIC.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering
wheel buttons you will not have all of the features listed
above, and you will turn off, or acknowledge DIC
messages by using the trip odometer reset stem located
on the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay the DIC will display the current driver (1 or 2)
and the information that was last displayed before the
engine was turned off.
A (Trip Information): This button will display the
odometer, personal trip odometer, business trip
odometer, hourmeter, annual log and the timer.
B (Fuel Information): This button will display the
current range, average fuel economy, instant fuel
economy and engine oil life.
3-56
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Pressing any of the four buttons will
acknowledge (clear) most current warnings or service
messages. Some warnings that cannot be acknowledged
(cleared) are: ENGINE OVERHEATED, OIL PRESSURE
LOW, REDUCED ENGINE POWER, TRANS HOT IDLE
ENGINE. These warnings must be dealt with immediately
and therefore cannot be cleared until the problem has
been corrected.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the four buttons on the DIC. These buttons are
trip information, fuel information, personalization and
select. The button functions are detailed in the following.
Trip Information Button
Press the trip information button to scroll through the
ODOMETER, PERSONAL TRIP ON/OFF, BUSINESS
TRIP ON/OFF, HOURMETER, ANNUAL LOG and
TIMER. If the personal trip and/or the business trip are
set to ON, you will also be able to scroll through
more messages. See “Personal Trip” and “Business
Trip” next for more information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering
wheel buttons you can select the trip information
by pressing the trip odometer reset stem on the
instrument panel cluster.
Personal Trip
Turn PERSONAL TRIP on or off by pressing the select
button. When it is on, you will also be able to scroll
through the following by pressing the trip information
button:
• PERSONAL: XXXXXX.X MI — This shows the
current distance traveled since the last reset for the
personal trip odometer in either miles or kilometers.
• PERSONAL: XXXX.X GAL — This shows the
amount of fuel used for the personal trip.
• PERSONAL: XX.X MPG— This shows how many
miles per gallon of fuel your vehicle is getting for
the personal trip based on current and past driving
conditions.
• PERSONAL: XXX.X AVG MPH — This shows the
vehicle’s average speed for the personal trip.
• PERSONAL: % ANNUAL — This shows the ratio of
personal trip miles to annual miles as a percent.
You can reset the personal trip odometer by pressing
and holding the trip odometer reset stem.
3-57
Business Trip
Turn BUSINESS TRIP on or off by pressing the select
button. When it is on, you will also be able to scroll
through the following by pressing the trip information
button:
• BUSINESS: XXXXXX.X MI — This shows the
current distance traveled since the last reset for the
business trip odometer in either miles or kilometers.
• BUSINESS: XXXX.X GAL — This shows the
amount of fuel used for the business trip.
• BUSINESS: XX.X MPG — This shows the amount
of fuel used for the business trip.
• BUSINESS: XXX.X AVG MPH — This shows the
vehicle’s average speed for the business trip.
• BUSINESS: % ANNUAL — This shows the ratio of
business trip miles to annual miles as a percent.
To reset personal or business trip information press and
hold the select button for approximately one second
while in one of the personal or business trip modes.
This will reset all of the information for the personal or
business trip.
3-58
You can also reset the PERSONAL: XX MI, or
BUSINESS: XX MI while they are displayed by pressing
the reset stem on the cluster. If you press and hold
the reset stem or select button for four seconds,
the display will show the distance traveled since the
last ignition cycle for the personal or business trip.
Odometer
Press the trip information button until ODOMETER
appears on the display. This shows the total distance
the vehicle has been driven in either miles or kilometers.
Pressing the reset stem located on the instrument
cluster with the vehicle off will also display the odometer.
Hourmeter
Press the trip information button to scroll to the
hourmeter. The hourmeter shows the total number of
hours the engine has run. Pressing and holding the reset
stem for about 4 seconds on the instrument cluster
will also display the hourmeter after the odometer
is displayed when the vehicle is off.
Annual Log
Fuel Information Button
Press the trip information button to scroll to the annual
log. The annual log shows the mileage accumulated
since it was last reset. To reset the annual log,
press and hold the select button, or the trip odometer
reset stem, for approximately one second.
Use the fuel information button to scroll through the
range, average fuel economy, instant fuel economy and
the GM Oil Life System.
Timer
The DIC can be used as a stopwatch. Press the select
button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.
The display will show the amount of time that has
passed since the timer was last reset (not including time
the ignition is off). Time will continue to be counted as
long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59), after which
the display will roll back to zero.
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
If your vehicle is not equipped with DIC steering wheel
control buttons you will not be able to display the
fuel information.
Fuel Range
Press the fuel information button until RANGE appears
to display the remaining distance you can drive
without refueling. It’s based on fuel economy and the
fuel remaining in the tank. The display will show LOW if
the fuel level is low.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button, or the trip odometer reset stem, while TIMER
is displayed.
3-59
Average Fuel Economy
GM Oil Life System
Press the fuel information button until AVG ECON
appears in the display. Average fuel economy is how
many miles per gallon your vehicle is getting based on
current and past driving conditions.
Press the fuel information button until ENGINE OIL LIFE
appears in the display. The GM Oil Life System shows
an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It will show
100% when the system is reset after an oil change.
It will alert you to change your oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving conditions.
Press and hold the select button for two seconds while
AVG ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel
economy. Average fuel economy will then be calculated
starting from that point. If the average fuel economy
is not reset, it will be continually updated each time
you drive.
Instant Fuel Economy
Press the fuel information button until INST ECON
appears in the display. Instant fuel economy is how
many miles per gallon your vehicle is getting at
the particular moment in time. The instant fuel
economy cannot be reset.
3-60
Always reset the engine oil life after an oil change.
To reset the Oil Life System use the fuel button to reach
the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen and then press and
hold the select button for five seconds while ENGINE
OIL LIFE is displayed. OIL LIFE RESET will appear on
the display for 10 seconds to let you know the system
is reset.
The DIC does not replace the need to maintain your
vehicle as recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in
this manual. Also, the oil change reminder will not detect
dusty conditions or engine malfunctions that may affect
the oil. Also, the oil change reminder does not measure
how much oil you have in your engine. So, be sure to
check your oil level often. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
Personalization Button
You can program certain features to a preferred setting
for up to two people. Press the personalization button
to scroll through the following personalization features.
All of the personalization options may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on your DIC.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering
wheel buttons you will not have any of the following
personalization options except for DISPLAY
LANGUAGE. See DISPLAY LANGUAGE later in this
section for more information.
•
•
•
•
•
•
AUTOMATIC LOCKING
AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING
DELAYED LOCKING
REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT
PERIMETER LIGHTING
SEAT POSITION RECALL
EASY EXIT DRIVER SEAT
CURB VIEW ASSIST
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY UNITS (ENG/MET)
The default options for the above features were set
when your vehicle left the factory. The default options
are noted in the text following, but may have been
changed from their default state since then.
The driver’s preferences can be recalled by pressing the
unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
labeled 1 or 2 or by pressing the appropriate memory
button 1 or 2 located on the driver’s door.
ALARM WARNING TYPE
REMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK
3-61
Alarm Warning Type
Automatic Locking
Press the personalization button until ALARM
WARNING TYPE appears in the display. To select
your personalization for alarm warning type, press the
select button while ALARM WARNING TYPE is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC
LOCKING appears in the display. To select your
personalization for automatic locking, press the select
button while AUTOMATIC LOCKING is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is
active.
LOCK DOORS MANUALLY: The doors will not be
locked automatically.
ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
warning on activation.
LOCK DOORS WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp
when the alarm is active.
LOCK DOORS OUT OF PARK (default): The doors
will lock when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash
when the alarm is active.
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the
DIC
to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on automatic door locks see
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while your choice is displayed
on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on alarm warning type see
Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-18.
3-62
Automatic Unlocking
Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC
UNLOCKING appears in the display. To select
your personalization for automatic unlocking, press the
select button while AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
UNLOCK ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
UNLOCK DOORS MANUALLY: The doors will not be
unlocked automatically.
UNLOCK DRIVER IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on automatic door locks see
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
Delayed Locking
If your DIC does not have this feature, you can still
program the delayed locking feature. See Delayed
Locking on page 2-10 for more information.
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the keyless entry transmitter and a door or the liftgate is
open, the delayed locking feature will delay locking
the doors and tailgate until five seconds after the last
door is closed.
Press the personalization button until DELAYED
LOCKING appears in the display. To select your
personalization for delayed locking, press the select
button while DELAYED LOCKING is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
DELAYED LOCKING ON: The doors will not lock until
five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is
closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that the
delayed locking feature is in use. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the lock button
on the door or keyless entry transmitter a second time.
DELAYED LOCKING OFF: The doors will lock
immediately when pressing the power lock switch or
the lock button on the keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on automatic door locks see
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
3-63
Seat Position Recall
Perimeter Lighting
Press the personalization button until SEAT POSITION
RECALL appears in the display. To select your
personalization for seat position recall, press the select
button while SEAT POSITION RECALL is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
Press the personalization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTING appears in the display. To select your
personalization for perimeter lighting, press the select
button while PERIMETER LIGHTING is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
SEAT POSITION RECALL OFF (default): The memory
seat position you saved will only be recalled when the
memory button 1 or 2 is pressed.
PERIMETER LIGHTING ON (default): The headlamps
and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if it
is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
SEAT POSITION RECALL AT KEY IN: The memory
seat position you saved will be recalled when you
put the key in the ignition.
SEAT POSITION RECALL ON REMOTE: The memory
seat position you saved will be recalled when you
unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on seat position recall see Memory Seat on
page 2-61.
3-64
PERIMETER LIGHTING OFF: The perimeter lights will
not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
Remote Lock Feedback
Remote Unlock Feedback
Press the personalization button until REMOTE LOCK
FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select your
personalization for the feedback you will receive when
locking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter, press the select button while REMOTE
LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will scroll through the following choices:
Press the personalization button until REMOTE UNLOCK
FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select your
personalization for the feedback you will receive when
unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter, press the select button while REMOTE
UNLOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will scroll through the following choices:
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter
and the horn will chirp the second time you press the
lock button.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with
the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when locking the vehicle.
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the lock symbol
on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock
button.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when unlocking the vehicle.
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the lock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
3-65
Headlamps On At Exit
Curb View Assist
Press the personalization button until HEADLAMPS ON
AT EXIT appears in the display. To select your
personalization for how long the headlamps will stay on
when you turn off the vehicle, press the select button
while HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
Press the personalization button until CURB VIEW
ASSIST appears in the display. To select your
personalization for curb view assist, press the select
button while CURB VIEW ASSIST is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (default)
HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 60 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 120 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 180 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY OFF
The amount of time you choose will be the amount of
time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off
the vehicle. If you choose off, the headlamps will turn
off as soon as you turn off the vehicle.
Choose one of the seven options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
3-66
CURB VIEW: OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: DRIVER: The driver’s outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: BOTH: The driver’s and passenger’s
outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle
is shifted into REVERSE (R).
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on tilt mirror in reverse see
Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors on page 2-50.
Easy Exit Driver Seat
Display Units (ENG/MET)
Press the personalization button until EASY EXIT
DRIVER SEAT appears in the display. To select your
personalization for seat position exit, press the
select button while EASY EXIT DRIVER SEAT is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
Press the personalization button until DISPLAY UNITS
appears in the display. To select English or metric,
press the select button while DISPLAY UNITS is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit recall
will occur.
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move to
the exit position when the key is removed from the
ignition.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on seat position exit see
Memory Seat on page 2-61.
• UNITS: ENGLISH
• UNITS: METRIC
If you choose English, all information will be displayed
in English units. For example, distance in miles and
fuel economy in miles per gallon.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and end out of the personalization options.
3-67
Display Language
Select Button
To select your personalization for display language,
press the select button while DISPLAY LANGUAGE is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button
will scroll through the following languages:
The select button is used to reset certain functions and
turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC display.
The select button also toggles through the options
available in each personalization menu. For example,
this button will reset the trip odometers, turn off the
FUEL LEVEL LOW message, and toggle through
the languages you can select the DIC to display
information in.
• English
• French
• Spanish
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
If you accidentally choose a language that you don’t
want or understand, press and hold the personalization
button and the trip information button at the same
time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages
in their particular language. English will be in English,
French will be in French and so on. When you see
the language that you would like, release both buttons.
The DIC will then display the information in the
language you chose.
You can also scroll through the different languages
by pressing and holding the trip reset stem for
four seconds, as long as you are in the odometer mode.
3-68
DIC Warnings and Messages
Warning messages are displayed on the DIC to notify
the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and
that some action may be needed by the driver to
correct the condition. If there is more than one message
that needs to be displayed they will appear one after
another. Some messages may not require immediate
action but you should press the select button to
acknowledge that you received the message and clear it
from the display. Some messages cannot be cleared
from the display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be removed
from the DIC display. The following are the possible
messages that can be displayed and some information
about them.
BATTERY NOT CHARGING
BUCKLE PASSENGER
If the battery is not charging during operation, this
message will appear on the DIC. Driving with this
problem could drain your battery. Have the electrical
system checked as soon as possible. Press the select
button to acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
If your vehicle is equipped with the passenger sensing
system, this message reminds you to buckle the
passenger’s seatbelt. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-82. This message will come on and a
chime will sound when the ignition is in RUN and the
driver’s seatbelt is buckled and the passenger’s seatbelt
is unbuckled with the passenger airbag enabled.
Press the select button to acknowledge this message
and clear it from the DIC display.
BUCKLE SEATBELT
If your vehicle is equipped with the passenger sensing
system, this message reminds you to buckle the
driver’s and/or passenger’s seatbelt. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-82. The message will come
on and a chime will sound when the ignition is in RUN
and the following conditions occur:
• The driver’s seatbelt is unbuckled.
• The driver’s seatbelt is unbuckled and the
passenger’s seatbelt is unbuckled with the
passenger airbag enabled.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
This message is displayed when the engine oil needs to
be changed.
When you change the engine oil, be sure to reset the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL message. This message
will clear itself after 10 seconds until the next ignition
cycle, or until the message is reset. See Engine Oil,
When to Change under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
Press the select button to acknowledge the message
and clear it from the DIC display.
3-69
CHECK OIL LEVEL
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
If the oil level in the vehicle is low, this message will
appear on the DIC. Check the oil level and correct it as
necessary. You may need to let the vehicle cool or warm
up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message will
clear. The message will clear itself after 10 seconds, until
the next ignition cycle. Once the problem is corrected,
press the select button to clear the message from the
DIC display.
If the driver’s door is not fully closed, this message will
appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Press the select
button to acknowledge the message and clear it from
the DIC display.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System, and a low tire pressure is detected in
any of the vehicle’s tires, this message will appear
on the DIC, along with a chime. Press the select button,
or reset stem, to acknowledge the message and clear
it from the DIC display. It will appear at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure.
CHECK WASHER FLUID
If the washer fluid level is low, this message will appear
on the DIC. Press the select button to acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display. The message
will clear itself after 10 seconds, or until the next ignition
cycle. Adding washer fluid will clear the message.
3-70
ENGINE COOLANT HOT
If the cooling system temperature gets hot, this message
will appear in the DIC. Stop the vehicle and let the engine
idle in PARK (P) to allow the coolant to reach a safe
temperature. This message will clear when the coolant
temperature drops to safe operating temperature.
To acknowledge this message press the select button
ENGINE OVERHEATED
If the engine cooling system reaches unsafe
temperatures for operation, this message will appear in
the DIC and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe
damage. The message will clear when the engine has
cooled to a safe operating temperature.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
LOW COOLANT LEVEL
If the fuel level is low, this message will appear on the
DIC and you will hear a chime. Refuel as soon as
possible. Press the select button to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
If your vehicle is equipped with a low coolant level
sensor, this message will appear on the DIC if
the engine coolant level is low. Adding coolant will clear
the message.
KEYFOB X BATTERY LOW
OIL LIFE RESET
If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, this
message will appear on the DIC. The battery needs
to be replaced in the transmitter. Press the select button
to acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display.
This message will appear on the DIC display for about
10 seconds after the change engine oil message is
reset.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
If low oil pressure levels occur, this message will be
displayed on the DIC and a chime will sound. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate
it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
If the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed, this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door
for obstacles, and close the door again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC. Press the
select button to acknowledge the message and clear
it from the DIC display.
OIL PRESSURE LOW
3-71
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
REPLACE LIFTGATE FUSE
If the passenger’s door is not fully closed, this message
will appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Press the select
button to acknowledge the message and clear it from
the DIC display.
This message will be displayed if the liftgate lock
malfunctions and/or the liftgate fuse blows. For more
information on fuses, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-111.
REAR ACCESS OPEN
If the liftgate is open while the ignition is in RUN,
this message will appear on the DIC display and you
will hear a chime. Turn the vehicle off and check
the liftgate. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display. Press the select button to
acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC
display.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
This message is displayed when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters
the engine coolant protection mode.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-29 for further
information.
3-72
If the message returns after replacing the fuse, see you
dealer for service.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed, this
message will appear on the display and you will hear
a chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if
the message still appears on the DIC. Press the select
button to acknowledge the message and clear it
from the DIC display.
SERVICE AIRBAG
If there is a problem with the air bag system, this
message will be displayed on the DIC. Have a qualified
technician inspect the system for problems. Press the
select button to acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
If there is a problem with the brake system, this
message will be displayed on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed,
or appears again when you begin driving, the brake
system needs service. Press the select button to
acknowledge the message.
SERVICE 4 WHEEL STEER
If a problem occurs with the 4 Wheel Steer system,
this message will appear on the DIC. If the message
appears, stop as soon as possible, and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed,
or appears again when you begin driving, the 4 Wheel
Steer system needs service. Press the select button
to acknowledge the message.
SERVICE 4WD
If a problem occurs with the four wheel drive system
this message will appear on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed,
or appears again when you begin driving, the four wheel
drive system needs service. Press the select button to
acknowledge the message.
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
If a problem occurs with the suspension system,
this message will appear on the DIC. If the message
appears turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the DIC display. If the
message is still displayed, or appears again when
you begin driving, the ride control needs service.
Press the select button to acknowledge the message.
SERVICE STABILITY
If you ever see the SERVICE STABILITY message,
it means there may be a problem with your Stabilitrak®
system. If you see this message try to reset the
system (stop; turn off the engine; then start the engine
again). If the SERVICE STABILITY message still
comes on, it means there is a problem. You should see
your dealer for service. The vehicle is safe to drive,
however, you do not have the benefit of Stabilitrak®,
so reduce your speed and drive accordingly. Press the
select button to acknowledge the message and clear
it from the DIC display.
3-73
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
STABILITY SYS DISABLED
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System, this message will be displayed if one or
more of the tire monitor sensors have malfunctioned,
or if all of the tire monitor sensors have not been
programmed successfully. Press the select button or
reset stem, to clear it from the display. The message will
reappear at each ignition cycle until the system has
been serviced.
The STABILITY SYS DISABLED message will turn on
when you press the Stabilitrak® button, or when the
stability control has been automatically disabled. To limit
wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability
enhancement system, you should normally leave
Stabilitrak® on. However, you should turn Stabilitrak® off
if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow
and you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it,
or if you are driving in extreme off-road conditions
and require more wheel spin. See If You Are Stuck:
In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-52. To turn the
Stabilitrak® system back on press the Stabilitrak® button
again. There are four conditions that can cause this
message to appear. One condition is overheating, which
could occur if Stabilitrak® activates continuously for
an extended period of time. The message will also be
displayed if the brake system warning light is on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-45.
The message could be displayed if the stability system
takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic
checks due to driving conditions. Also, if an engine or
vehicle related problem has been detected, and the
vehicle needs service, the message will appear.
STABILITY SYS ACTIVE
You may see the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message on
the DIC. It means that an advanced computer-controlled
system has come on to help your vehicle continue to
go in the direction in which you’re steering. Stabilitrak®
activates when the computer senses that your vehicle
is just starting to spin, as it might if you hit a patch of ice
or other slippery spot on the road. When the system
activates, you may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the
brake pedal. This is normal. When the STABILITY
SYS ACTIVE message is on, you should continue to
steer in the direction you want to go. The system
is designed to help you in bad weather or other difficult
driving situations by making the most of whatever
road conditions will permit.
3-74
The message will turn off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
TRANSMISSION HOT
If the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly this
message may appear along with the check engine light
on the instrument panel. Reinstall the fuel cap, making
sure to fully install the cap. See Filling Your Tank
on page 5-8. The diganostic system can determine
if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the light and message off.
If the transmission fluid temperature becomes high,
the message center will display this message.
TRACTION ACTIVE
When the traction control system has detected that any
of the vehicle’s wheels are spinning, the traction
control system will activate and this message will appear
on the DIC. For more information see Traction Assist
System (TAS) on page 4-9,
When the transmission enters the protection mode,
you may notice a change in the transmission shifting
patterns. When the transmission fluid temperature
returns to normal, the display will turn off and the
transmission shifting patterns will return to normal.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while transmission
temperature warning is displayed.
TRACTION SYS LIMITED
If the brake traction-control system activates constantly
or if the brakes have heated up due to high-speed
braking, brake traction-control will be disabled and the
TRACTION SYS LIMITED message will be displayed.
The system will return to normal operation after the
brakes have cooled.
3-75
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Towing a trailer
Hot outside air temperatures
Hauling a large or heavy load
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler.
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures
on a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for the proper transmission maintenance
intervals.
TURN SIGNAL ON
If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km),
this message will appear on the display and you will
hear a chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to
the off position. Press the select button to acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
3-76
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio – be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been added
improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with
it first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle,
find out what your audio system can do and how to
operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your
audio system even after the ignition is turned off.
See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under Ignition
Positions on page 2-21.
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Press and hold the HR or MIN arrow for two seconds.
Then press HR until the correct hour appears on
the display. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute
appears on the display. The time may be set with the
ignition on or off.
Your radio may have a button marked with an H or
HR to represent hours and an M or MN to represent
minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. Press and hold the minute
button until the correct minute appears on the display.
The time may be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time
until RDS TIME appears on the display. To accept this
time, press and hold the hour and minute buttons,
at the same time, for another 2 seconds. If the time is
not available from the station, NO UPDAT will appear on
the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Once you have
tuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a
few minutes for your time to update.
3-77
AM-FM Radio
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Time display is available with the ignition turned off.
3-78
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go
to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to
stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for more than four seconds until you hear
two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station
stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then
go on to the next preset station. Press either SEEK
arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will seek and scan only to stations that are in
the selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) by performing the
following steps:
AUDIO: To adjust bass and treble, press and release
AUDIO until BAS or TRE appears on the display.
Then press and hold the up or the down arrow to
increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy,
you may want to decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that
numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BAS or TRE. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep. B and a zero or
T and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio by waiting
for the display to change to the time display. Then press
and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you
hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
3-79
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Radio Messages
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press and release AUDIO until
BAL appears on the display. Then press and hold the
up or the down arrow to move the sound toward the right
or the left speakers.
CAL (Calibrated): Your audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that your radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to the dealer for service.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release AUDIO until FAD appears
on the display. Then press and hold the up or the
down arrow to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
Theftlock® system has locked up. Your vehicle must be
returned to the dealer for service.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. L and a zero
or F and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio by waiting for
the display to change to the time display. Then press
and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until
you hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
Fade may not be available if you have a regular cab
model.
3-80
Radio with CD
Radio Data System (RDS)
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
If your vehicle is equipped with the Bose® audio
system, your vehicle will have six Bose® amplified
speakers.
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display
instead of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide
the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-81
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(48 Contiguous US States)
XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio service
that offers 100 coast to coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
3-82
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation as vehicle speed increases.
To turn automatic volume off, press this button until
AVOL OFF appears on the display.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Time display is available with the ignition off.
For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change what
appears on the display while using RDS. The display
options are station name, RDS station frequency,
PTY and the name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (48 contiguous US states, if equipped), press
the DISPL knob while in XM mode to retrieve four
different categories of information related to the current
song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,
Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (48 contiguous US states,
if equipped). The display will show your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2
(48 contiguous US states, if equipped), by performing
the following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
q SEEK r:
Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
q SCAN r:
Press and hold either arrow for
more than two seconds. SCAN will appear on the
display and you will hear a beep. The radio will go to a
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow
for more than four seconds. PSCN will appear on
the display and you will hear two beeps. The radio will
go to the first preset station, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next preset station. Press either arrow
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep.
Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton,
the station you set will return and the equalization
that you selected will be automatically stored for that
pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-83
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance to the right and the
left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display, you will hear a beep and the display level
will be adjusted to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble,
returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
If you radio is equipped with the Bose audio system,
your equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-84
To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until
the radio produces one beep. The balance and fade
will be adjusted to the middle position and the display
will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display, you will hear a beep and the display level
will be adjusted to the middle position.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button or one of the SEEK arrows
to take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTY
and the PTY is displayed, press the SEEK TYPE
button once. If the PTY is not displayed, press
the SEEK TYPE button twice to display the PTY and
then to go to another station.
5. Press the P-TYPE knob to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type,
NONE will appear on the display and the radio will return
to the last station you were listening to.
SCAN: You can scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin scanning
the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop scanning.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-85
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
RDS Messages
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.
You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop
during the announcement. You will not be able to turn
off alert announcements.
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that
numbered pushbutton, the PTY you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message.
The message may display the artist, song title,
call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message at your own speed, press
the INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words
will appear on the display with each press. Once the
complete message has been displayed, the information
3-86
symbol will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The old message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
an old message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO will appear on the display.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display,
the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements and
when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will
stop and TRAF will be displayed. When a traffic
announcement comes on the tuned radio station you
will hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will
appear on the display.
If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAF
button to turn off the traffic announcements.
Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if
the volume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of
a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): Your audio system
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.
If CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that your
radio has not been configured properly for the vehicle
and must be returned to the dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. You must return
to the dealer for service.
3-87
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption
code
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of your
presets, you may need to choose another station for that
preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
3-88
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. Your system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the category you
selected. Your system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this
message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message
alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate your service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0,
you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail
location.
3-89
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
The CD symbol will appear on the display. If you want
to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the
eject button or the DISPL knob.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on
the ignition or the radio, the CD will start playing, where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
3-90
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to
the current track if it has been playing for more
than eight seconds. TRACK and the track number will
appear on the display. If you hold this pushbutton
or press it more than once, the player will continue
moving backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times
the normal playing speed. Release it to play the
passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
ET and the elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
q SEEK r:
Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current or to the previous track. Press the
right arrow to go to the start of the next track. If you
hold either arrow or press it more than once, the player
will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.
q SCAN r: To scan the CD, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the
CD. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
of the track will appear on the display. To change the
default on the display (track or elapsed time), press this
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and the selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to stop a CD when it is
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
3-91
CD Messages
Radio with Cassette and CD
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-92
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
If your vehicle is equipped with the Bose® audio
system, your vehicle will have six Bose® amplified
speakers.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use
only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(48 Contiguous US States)
XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio service
that offers 100 coast to coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
3-93
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation as vehicle speed increases.
To turn automatic volume off, press this button until
AVOL OFF appears on the display.
3-94
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Time display is available with the ignition turned off.
For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (48 contiguous US states, if equipped), press
the DISPL knob while in XM mode to retrieve four
different categories of information related to the current
song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,
Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (48 contiguous US states,
if equipped). The display will show your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, or six XM1 and six XM2
(48 contiguous US states, if equipped), by performing
the following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
q SEEK r:
Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
q SCAN r:
Press and hold either arrow for
more than two seconds. SCAN will appear on the
display and you will hear a beep. The radio will go to a
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow
for more than four seconds. PSCN will appear on
the display and you will hear two beeps. The radio will
go to the first preset station, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next preset station. Press either arrow
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep.
Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton,
the station you set will return and the equalization
that you selected will be automatically stored for
that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-95
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display, you will hear a beep and the display level
will be adjusted to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble,
returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
If you radio is equipped with the Bose audio system,
your equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-96
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until
the radio produces one beep. The balance and fade
will be adjusted to the middle position and the display
will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display, you will hear a beep and the display level
will be adjusted to the middle position.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button or one of the SEEK arrows
to take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTY
and the PTY is displayed, press the SEEK TYPE
button once. If the PTY is not displayed, press
the SEEK TYPE button twice to display the PTY and
then to go to another station.
5. Press the P-TYPE knob to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
SCAN: You can scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin scanning
the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop scanning.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on, press
and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will appear on
the display. The radio may switch to stronger stations.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type,
NONE will appear on the display and the radio will
return to the last station you were listening to.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-97
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
RDS Messages
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.
You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a cassette tape or CD is playing. If a cassette tape or
CD is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message.
The message may display the artist, song title,
call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message at your own speed, press
the INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words
will appear on the display with each press. Once the
complete message has been displayed, the information
3-98
symbol will disappear from the display until another
new message is received. The old message can
be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can
view an old message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO will appear on the display.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display,
the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio will
seek to a station that does. When the radio finds
a station that broadcasts traffic announcements,
it will stop and TRAF will be displayed. When a traffic
announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will
hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear
on the display.
If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAF
button to turn off the traffic announcements.
Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if the
volume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of a
cassette tape or CD if the last tuned station broadcasts
traffic announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): Your audio system
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.
If CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that your
radio has not been configured properly for the vehicle
and must be returned to the dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. You must
return to the dealer for service.
3-99
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption
code
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of your
presets, you may need to choose another station for that
preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
3-100
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. Your system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the category you
selected. Your system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this
message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message
alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate your service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0,
you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail
location.
3-101
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer
than that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
The longer side with the tape visible should face to the
right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is off, the tape can
be inserted and will begin playing. A tape symbol will
appear on the display whenever a tape is inserted. If you
hear nothing, or hear a garbled sound, the tape may not
be in squarely. Press the eject button to remove the tape
and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO, and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. TAPE
will appear on the display and an arrow showing which
side of the tape is playing. The tape player automatically
begins playing the other side when it reaches the
end of the tape.
If you want to insert a tape while the ignition is off, first
press the eject button or the DISPL knob. Cassette
tape adapter kits for portable CD players will work in
your cassette tape player.
Your tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
3-102
1 PREV (Previous): Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for previous
to work. Press this pushbutton to go to the previous
selection on the tape if the current selection has been
playing for less than three seconds. If pressed when the
current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or
the beginning of the current selection, depending upon
the position on the tape. If pressed when the current
selection has been playing for more than 13 seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the current selection.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the
number of selections to be searched back, up to -9.
2 NEXT: Your tape must have at least three seconds of
silence between each selection for next to work. Press
this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the tape. If
you press the pushbutton more than once, the player will
continue moving forward through the tape. SEEK and a
positive number will appear on the display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the
tape rapidly. Press this pushbutton again to return to
playing speed. The radio will play while the tape
reverses. The station frequency and REV will appear
on the display. You may select stations during reverse
operation by using TUNE and SEEK.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance
the tape rapidly. Press this pushbutton again to return
to playing speed. The radio will play while the tape
advances. The station frequency and FWD will appear
on the display. You may select stations during
forward operation by using TUNE and SEEK.
5 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side of
the tape.
q SEEK r: The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If you hole either arrow or press it
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
or backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive
or negative number will appear on the display.
q SCAN r: To scan the tape, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each selection on
the current side of the tape. Press either SCAN arrow
again, to stop scanning. Your tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection
for scan to work.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to stop a tape when it
is playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing.
Eject may be activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes
may be loaded with the radio off if this button is
pressed first.
3-103
Cassette Tape Messages
CD Adapter Kits
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on
the display, the tape will not play because of one of
the following errors:
It is possible to use a portable CD player with your
cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature
on your tape player.
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your
tape may be damaged and should not be used in
the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player
is working properly.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-138.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-104
To activate the bypass feature, perform the following
steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five
seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the tape symbol on the display will flash, indicating
the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot.
It will power up the radio and begin playing.
The override feature will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
The CD symbol will appear on the display. If you want
to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the
eject button or the DISPL knob.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on
the ignition or the radio, the CD will start playing, where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to
the current track if it has been playing for more
than eight seconds. TRACK and the track number will
appear on the display. If you hold this pushbutton
or press it more than once, the player will continue
moving backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
ET and the elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
3-105
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
ET and the elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time of the track will appear on the display. To change
the default on the display (track or elapsed time),
press this knob until you see the display you want, then
hold the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep and the selected display will now be the
default.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening
q SEEK r:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or to the previous track. Press the right arrow
to go to the start of the next track. If you hold either arrow
or press it more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.
q SCAN r: To scan the CD, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the
CD. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
3-106
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette
tape or CD when listening to the radio. The inactive
tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening.
Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it is
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs may
be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is
pressed first.
CD Messages
Listening to a DVD
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will
appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is
available and can be listened to through your vehicle’s
speakers. To listen to the DVD, press the TAPE
DISC button until RSE appears on the radio display.
The current radio source will stop and the DVD sound
will come through the speakers. To stop listening to
the DVD, press the TAPE DISC button, if a cassette
tape or a CD is loaded, or press the BAND button
to select a different source.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol
will go off of the radio display and RSE OFF will appear
on the radio display. The radio will return to the last
radio source that you were listening to.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-107
Radio with Six-Disc CD
Radio Data System (RDS)
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
If your vehicle is equipped with the Bose® audio
system, your vehicle will have six Bose® amplified
speakers.
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-108
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(48 Contiguous US States)
XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio service
that offers 100 coast to coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOLUME: Turn the knob to increase or to decrease
volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation as vehicle speed increases.
To turn automatic volume off, press this button until
AVOL OFF appears on the display.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Pressing this knob with the ignition off will display
the time.
For XM™ (48 contiguous US states, if equipped), press
the RCL knob while in XM™ mode to retrieve four
different categories of information related to the current
song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,
Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the RCL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
3-109
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (48 contiguous US states,
if equipped). The display will show your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2
(48 contiguous US states, if equipped), by performing
the following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
sSEEK t: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
sSCAN t:
Press and hold either SCAN arrow
for two seconds until SC appears on the display and
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station,
play for a few seconds, then go on to the next station.
Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will
appear on the display and you will hear a double beep.
The radio will go to a preset station stored on your
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again to
stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the selected
band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-110
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will be automatically stored for that
pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS or TREB
appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase or to
decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push the AUDIO knob until BAL
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BASS or TREB and push and hold the AUDIO knob.
The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display
level to zero.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on
the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the
front or the rear speakers.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, select balance or fade and push and hold the
AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep and
adjust the display level to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble,
returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
If you radio is equipped with the Bose audio system,
your equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-111
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected
PTY will appear on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the PTY and take you to
the PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTY
and the PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrow
once. If the PTY is not displayed, press either
SEEK arrow twice to display the PTY and then to
go to another station.
5. Press the P-TYPE button to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
3-112
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY
you want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk
will appear beside that PTY on the display. You may
select multiple interrupts if desired. When you are
listening to a CD, the last selected RDS station will
interrupt play if that selected program type format
is broadcast.
SCAN: You can scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger
stations.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.
You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that
numbered pushbutton, the PTY you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-113
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a CD is playing. If the CD player is playing, play will
stop during the announcement. You will not be able
to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message at your own speed, press
the INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words will
appear on the display with each press. Once the
complete message has been displayed, INFO will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received. The old message can be displayed by
pressing the INFO button. You can view an old message
until a new message is received or a different station
is tuned to.
3-114
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display,
the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds
a station that broadcasts traffic announcements,
the radio will stop and brackets will be displayed around
TRAF. When a traffic announcement comes on the
tuned radio station you will hear it. If no station is found,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,
you can then press the TRAF button to remove
the brackets or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows
to go to a station that supports traffic announcements.
If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on
the display.
Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if
the volume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play
of a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption
code
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of your
presets, you may need to choose another station for that
preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
3-115
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. Your system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the category you
selected. Your system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this
message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message
alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate your service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0,
you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail
location.
3-116
Playing a CD
If you turn off the ignition or radio with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on
the ignition or the radio, the CD will start playing, where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
LOAD CD Z: Press the LOAD side of this button to
load CDs into the CD player. This CD player will
hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to
turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. If you select an equalization setting for your
CD, it will be activated each time you play a CD.
The CD will begin to play automatically.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-117
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the light, located to the
right of the slot, will begin to flash.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the light will begin flashing
again. Once the light stops flashing and turns green
you can load another CD. The CD player takes up to
six CDs. Do not try to load more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When you have finished loading
CDs, the radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. If more than one CD has been loaded,
a number for each CD will appear on the display. If you
select an equalization setting for your CD, it will be
activated each time you play a CD.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
3-118
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button. Then press the numbered pushbutton that
corresponds to the CD you want to play. A small bar
will appear under the CD number that is playing,
and the track number will appear on the display.
If an error appears on the radio display,
see “CD Messages” later in this section.
LOAD CD Z (Eject): Press the CD eject side of this
button to eject a single CD or multiple CDs. To eject the
CD that is currently playing, press and release this
button. To eject multiple CDs, press and hold this button
for two seconds. You will hear a beep and the light will
flash to let you know when a CD is being ejected.
REMOVE CD will appear on the display. You can now
remove the CD. If the CD is not removed, after
25 seconds, the CD will be automatically pulled back into
the receiver. If you try to push the CD back into the
receiver, before the 25 second time period is complete,
the receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the
CD several times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a CD
after you have tried to push it in manually. The receivers
25-second eject timer will reset at each press of eject,
which will cause the receiver to not eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
Once the player stops and the CD is ejected, remove the
CD. After removing the CD, push the PWR knob off and
then on again. This will clear the CD-sensing feature and
enable CDs to be loaded into the player again.
{ REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release the pushbutton to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one track
or an entire CD. To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
CD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one of
the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the RDM button.
RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold the RDM button
for more than two seconds. RANDOM ALL will
appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn off
random play.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the desired equalization setting while playing
a CD. The equalization will be automatically set
whenever you play a CD. For more information on
AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in
this section.
sSEEK t: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have passed.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you
press either arrow more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
3-119
sSCAN t: To scan one CD, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep.
Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of
the currently selected CD. Press either SCAN arrow
again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of
each CD loaded. Press either SCAN arrow again,
to stop scanning.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display (track or elapsed time), press the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to play the radio when a
CD(s) is in the player.
Using Song List Mode
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display.
If S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST button
to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow to locate the track that you want to save.
The track will begin to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save the
track into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed a
beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of continuously pressing SONG LIST, two beeps will
sound to confirm that the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save
more than 20 selections.
3-120
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
the order that they were saved.
You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK
SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will
return you to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the
desired track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button. When
SONG LIST is pressed, a beep will be heard
immediately. After two seconds of continuously
pressing the SONG LIST button, two beeps will be
heard to confirm that the track has been deleted.
To delete the entire song list, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button. A beep will
be heard, followed by two beeps after two seconds
and a final beep will be heard after four seconds.
S-LIST EMPTY will appear on the display indicating
that the song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the
song list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed
from the display.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to the
song list, the track will be added to the end of the list.
3-121
CD Messages
Listening to a DVD
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display,
it could be for one of the following reasons:
If your vehicle has Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol
will appear on the radio display indicating that the
DVD is available and can be listened to through your
vehicles speakers. To listen to the DVD, press the
CD AUX button until RSE appears on the radio display.
The current radio source will stop and the DVD
sound will come through the speakers. To stop listening
to the DVD, press the CD AUX button, if a CD is
loaded, or press the BAND button to select a different
source.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-122
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol
will go off of the radio display and RSE OFF will appear
on the radio display. The radio will return to the last
radio source that you were listening to.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Your vehicle may have the optional Digital Versatile Disc
(DVD) Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. The
RSE system includes a DVD player, a video display
screen, two sets of wireless headphones, and a remote
control.
Before You Drive
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers. The driver
cannot safely view the video screen while driving and
should not try to do so.
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead console.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD player or by the buttons on the remote control.
See “Remote Control” later in this section for more
information.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate DVD region code for the
country that the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region
code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
Standard audio CDs (CD-R and CD-RW discs) can also
be played in this DVD player.
When using the wired headphones, if the front seat
passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-Disc CD
(if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(48 contiguous US states, if equipped), you will hear the
audio for these sources, instead of the DVD or CD
that is currently playing through the RSE.
If an error message appears on the video screen,
see “DVD Messages” later in this section.
The DVD player power may be turned on when the
ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
3-123
k (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD
is playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
y (Main DVD Menu):
Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when using a DVD.
DVD Player Buttons
O(Power): Press this button to turn the RSE system
on or off. The power indicator light will illuminate
when the power is on.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject a DVD or a CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to toggle between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
c(Stop):
Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
3-124
z (Set-up Menu):
Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, and display mode
(normal, full, or zoom). The dynamic range compression
feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase
low audio produced by some DVDs.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
Playing a Disc
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start,
if the vehicle ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or
when RAP is active.
To stop a disc, press and release the stop button on the
DVD player or the remote control. To resume playback,
press the play/pause button on the DVD player or
the remote control. As long as the disc has not been
ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice,
the movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped. If the disc has been ejected, or if the stop
button has been pressed twice, the disc will resume play
at the beginning of the DVD or CD.
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the face of the DVD player or on the
remote control.
Some DVDs will not allow you to fast forward or skip
the copyright information or previews. Some DVDs will
begin playing after the previews have finished. If the
DVD does not begin to play the main title, refer to the
on-screen instructions, as the DVD may be displaying
its main title menu.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the DVD player to eject
the disc.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc after a short
period of time. The disc will then be stored in the DVD
player. The DVD player will not resume play of this
disc automatically.
There is not an eject button on the remote control.
3-125
DVD Messages
The following errors may be displayed on the video
screen:
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a
disc is inserted upside down, not readable, or the
format is not compatible with the DVD player.
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the
disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the
DVD player cannot play the disc. Scratched or
damaged discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message will be displayed
if the region code of the DVD is not compatible with the
region code of the DVD player.
No Disc: This message will be displayed if any of the
buttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control are
pressed and no disc is present in the DVD player.
Parental Control Button: This button is located behind
the video screen. Press this button while a DVD or
CD is playing to freeze the video and mute the audio.
The video screen will display Parental Control ON
and the power indicator light on the DVD player will
flash. It will also disable all other button operations
3-126
from the remote control and the DVD player, with the
exception of the eject button. Press this button again to
restore operation of the DVD player.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the ignition is
in RUN, ACCESSORY, or if RAP is active.
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, push forward on the release
latch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’s
position as desired. When the video screen is not in
use, push it up into its latched position.
The DVD player and display will continue to operate
when the screen is in either the up or the down position.
The video screen contains the infrared transmitters for
the wireless headphones and the infrared receiver
for the remote control. If the screen is in the closed
position, the infrared signals will not be available for the
operation of the headphones or the remote control.
Notice: Directly touching the video screen may
damage it. Do not touch the screen. See Cleaning the
Video Screen on page 3-140 for more information.
Remote Control
Remote Control Buttons
To use the remote control, aim it at the infrared window
below the video screen and press the desired button.
Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the ability of
the entertainment system to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
function of the remote control.
Notice: Do not store the remote control in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the remote
control and it would not be covered by your vehicles
warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
on or off.
v (Title):
Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
3-127
z (Set-up Menu):
Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, and display mode
(normal, full, or zoom). The dynamic range compression
feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase
low audio produced by some DVDs.
e (Audio):
Press this button to display a menu that
will only appear when a DVD is being played. The format
and content of this function is dependent on the disc.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this button
again. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to toggle between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press
this button again to return to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The remote control
numeric keypad provides you with the capability of direct
chapter, title, and track number selection.
3-128
\:
Press this button, within 3 seconds after inputting
a numeric selection to clear all numeric inputs. Press
this button before inputting the number.
}10:
Press the button, to select chapter, title, and
track numbers greater than 9. Press this button before
inputting the number.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight will time out after
about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while
the backlight is on.
y (Main DVD Menu):
Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when using a DVD.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
q (Return):
Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button will operate only when a DVD is being played
and a menu is active.
| (Camera Angle):
This button changes camera
angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function is
dependent on the disc.
{ (Subtitle):
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
This button turns on subtitles and
moves through subtitle options when a DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function is dependent
on the disc.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly,
using the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
[ (Fast Forward):
3. Close the battery door securely.
Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
s (Play/Pause):
Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
Slow Play: When the DVD is playing, press the pause
button then press the fast forward button. The DVD
will continue playing in a slow play mode. To cancel slow
play mode, press the play/pause button.
Notice: Do not store the remote control in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the remote
control and it would not be covered by your vehicles
warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a cool,
dry place.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to advance
to the beginning of the next track or chapter. This button
may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
3-129
Headphones
Battery Replacement
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones.
To change the batteries, do the following:
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control.
An indicator light will illuminate on the headphones when
they are on. If the light does not illuminate, the batteries
may need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement”
following for more information.
Each set of headphones has a volume knob. To adjust
the volume, adjust this knob.
The headphones will automatically turn off if they lose
the infrared signal from the system after approximately
four minutes in order to preserve their battery power.
The signal may be lost if the system is turned off or if the
headphones are out of range of the infrared signal
transmitters that are located below the video display
screen.
When using the wired headphones, if the front seat
passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-Disc CD
(if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(48 contiguous US states, if equipped), you will hear the
audio for these sources, instead of the DVD or CD
that is currently playing through the RSE.
3-130
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly,
using the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Tighten the screw to close the compartment door.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen.
The RCA jacks allow you to connect audio and
video from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a
video game unit to your RSE system. Standard RCA
cables are needed to connect the auxiliary device to the
RCA jacks. The yellow connector inputs video and
the red and white connectors input right and left stereo
audio. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for
proper connection of your auxiliary device.
To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCA
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the
RSE system power on. If the RSE system had been
previously in the DVD player mode, pressing the SRCE
button on the faceplate or the remote control will
toggle the RSE system between the auxiliary device
and the DVD player.
How to Change the Video Format when in
the Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC.
In some countries, the video format may be in
PAL system. To change the video format, perform
the following:
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the Video
Format option.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the right or left arrow button to select
the desired video format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
3-131
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat
Audio system (if equipped)
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system
(if equipped). The RSE system may be selected as
an audio source on the rear seat audio system if the
RSE system power is on. Refer to Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) on page 3-135 for more information.
Problem
No power.
The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal
by infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” previously for more
information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to
the vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE
system may be selected as an audio source on the radio
if the RSE system power is on. Once the RSE system
is selected as an audio source on the radio you may
adjust the speaker volume on the radio. If the RSE
system power is not on, the RSE system will not be an
available source on the radio. Refer to the radio
information for the radio that your vehicle has for more
information.
3-132
Disc will not play.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
in on or accessory.
Check to make sure the
parental control button
has not been activated.
(The power indicator light
will flash if parental
control is active.)
The system might be off.
Check to make sure the
parental control button
has not been activated.
(The power indicator light
will flash if parental
control is active.)
The system might be in
auxiliary mode.
The disc is upside down
or is not compatible.
Problem
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the top
and bottom or on both
sides or it looks
stretched out.
The disc was ejected, but
it was pulled back into the
DVD player.
Recommended Action
Check the display mode
settings in the display
menu.
The disc is being stored in
the DVD player. Press the
eject button again to eject
the disc.
In auxiliary mode, the
Check the auxiliary input
picture moves or scrolls.
connections at both
devices.
Change the Video Format
to PAL or NTSC.
The language in the audio Check the audio or
or on the screen is wrong. language selection in the
main DVD menu.
Problem
The remote control does
not work.
Recommended Action
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
infrared window located
below the video screen.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
incorrectly.
Check to make sure the
parental control button
has not been activated.
(The power indicator light
will flash if parental
control is active.)
After stopping the player,
If the stop button was
I push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the DVD
the DVD starts where I left player will resume playing
off and sometimes at the
where the DVD was
beginning.
stopped. If the stop button
was pressed two times the
DVD player will begin to
play from the beginning of
the DVD.
3-133
Problem
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Recommended Action
Check that the DVD
player is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
My disc is stuck in the
Turn the DVD power off,
player. The Load/Eject
then on and press the
button does not work.
Load/Eject button on the
DVD player.
Do not attempt to forcibly
remove the disc from the
DVD player. This could
permanently damage the
disc and DVD player.
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions,
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
or buzzes.
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in
the vehicle.
Check that the
headphones are facing
the front of the vehicle.
3-134
Problem
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
The DVD is playing,
but there is no picture
or sound.
The audio/video skips
or jumps.
Recommended Action
See your dealer for
assistance.
Check that the DVD
player is in DVD mode.
The DVD or CD could be
dirty, scratched, or
damaged.
What is the best way to
Wipe the video screen
clean the video screen?
with a damp, soft cloth.
The audio from the radio The RSE is working
for the Radio with
correctly.
Six-Disc CD and XM™
Use the wireless
has taken over the audio headphones or have the
from the DVD or CD when front seat passengers
using the wired
listen to another audio
headphones.
source.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Rear Seat Audio Controls
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the audio sources: radio, cassette tapes, CDs, or
DVDs, depending on your vehicles options. In the event
that the front seat passengers are listening to any of
these remote sources the rear seat passengers can only
listen to the remote source being used by the front
passengers or FM, AM, or the radios internal CD.
For example, rear seat passengers may listen to
cassette tape, CDs, or DVDs through the headphones
while the driver listens to the radio through the front
speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of the
volume for each set of headphones. The front seat
audio controls always override the RSA controls.
RSA with HVAC Shown, RSA without HVAC Similar
3-135
The following functions are controlled by the RSA
system buttons:
P (Power):
Press this button to turn the rear seat
audio system on or off. The rear speakers will be muted
when the power is turned on unless your vehicle is
equipped with the Bose® audio system. You may
operate the rear seat audio functions even when the
primary radio power is off.
u (Volume):
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease
volume. The left knob controls the left headphone and
the right knob controls the right headphone.
SRC (Source): Press this button to select an audio
source: radio, cassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs, depending
on your vehicles options.
x SEEK w:
While listening to FM1, FM2, or AM
press the up or the down arrow to tune to the next or to
the previous station and stay there. If the front radio
is in use, you cannot seek through different stations.
While listening to a cassette tape, press the up or the
down arrow to hear the next or the previous selection.
If the cassette tape on the front radio is in use, you
cannot seek through different selections on a tape.
While listening to a CD, press the up arrow to hear the
next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go
back to the start of the current track if more than eight
seconds have played. If the CD player on the front radio
is in use, you cannot seek through different tracks.
PROG (Program): The front passengers must
be listening to something different for each of these
functions to work:
• Press this button to go to the preset radio stations
set on the pushbuttons on the main radio.
• When a cassette tape is playing, press this button
to go to the other side of the tape.
• When a CD is playing in the radio, press this button
to go back to the beginning of the CD.
• When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to select a disc.
3-136
Theft-Deterrent Feature
®
THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will
not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen.
g (OnStar/Voice Recognition):
If your vehicle has
OnStar®, you can press this button to interact with
the OnStar® system. See the OnStar® manual provided
with your vehicle for more information.
If your vehicle does not have OnStar®, pressing this
button will mute the audio system.
PROG (Program): Press this button to play a station
you have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons
on the selected band.
If a cassette tape is playing, press this button to play
the other side of the tape.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
If a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this button
to go to the next available CD.
You can control certain radio functions using the buttons
on your steering wheel.
Q SOURCE R: Press this button to select FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2, (48 contiguous US states,
if equipped), or a cassette tape or CD. The cassette or
CD must be loaded to play. Available loaded sources
are shown on the display as a tape or a CD symbol.
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous radio station and stay there.
If a cassette tape or CD is playing, the player will advance
with the up arrow and reverse with the down arrow.
Q VOLR (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease volume.
3-137
DVD Distortion
You may experience audio distortion in the
IR headphones when operating cellular phones,
scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(48 Contiguous US States)
XM™ Satellite Radio gives you digital radio reception
from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall buildings
or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing
the sound to come and go. Your radio may display
NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
* Excludes the OnStar® System.
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Radio Reception
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines.
Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
3-138
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after
every 50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN
to indicate that you have used your tape player for
50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer.
If this message appears on the display, your cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice
a reduction in sound quality, try a known good
cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault.
If this other cassette has no improvement in sound
quality, clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available
through your dealer.
When cleaning the cassette tape player with the
recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is
possible that the cassette may eject, because the cut
tape detection feature on your radio may recognize it
as a broken tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning
cassette from being ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five
seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut
tape detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to
clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will
not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner
may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type
cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type
cleaning cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display --- or CLEANED to show the
indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
3-139
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth
and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray directly
onto the screen and do not press too hard or too long on
the video screen.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System (48 Contiguous US States)
Your XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of your XM™ system may be affected
if your sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of your XM™ system. Make sure
that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.
Fixed Mast Antenna
Chime Level Adjustment
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the mast
is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
The radio is the vehicle chime producer. To change the
volume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 with the
ignition on and the radio power off. The chime volume
level will change from the normal level to loud, and LOUD
will appear on the display. To change back to the default
or normal setting, press and hold pushbutton 6 again.
The chime level will change from the loud level to normal,
and NORMAL will appear on the display. Each time the
chime volume is changed, three chimes will sound as an
example of the new volume selected. Removing the radio
and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime module
will disable vehicle chimes.
Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened
to the cowl. If tightening is required, tighten by hand,
then with a wrench one quarter turn.
3-140
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-6
Braking .........................................................4-6
Traction Assist System (TAS) ...........................4-9
Locking Rear Axle ........................................4-11
Stabilitrak® System .......................................4-12
Steering ......................................................4-15
QUADRASTEER™ ........................................4-17
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-20
Passing .......................................................4-20
Loss of Control .............................................4-22
Off-Road Driving ...........................................4-23
Driving at Night ............................................4-39
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-40
City Driving ..................................................4-43
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-44
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-45
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-46
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-46
Winter Driving ..............................................4-48
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-52
Towing ..........................................................4-55
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-55
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-55
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-58
Level Control ...............................................4-64
Autoride™ ...................................................4-64
Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-65
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-65
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-23.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
4-2
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver,
in both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive. But what if people do? How much is
“too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than
many might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
4-3
According to the American Medical Association,
a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the
person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.
All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being
in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have
a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC
level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance
of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,
the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times
greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is
25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving
at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping
enough space between your vehicle and others is
important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control of
your vehicle. Also see Traction Assist System (TAS) on
page 4-9.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock Brake System
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-46.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights will come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer for service.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions. This can help you steer around
the obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here’s what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-8
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Traction Assist System (TAS)
Using Anti-Lock
Your vehicle may have a Traction Assist System (TAS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only
if it senses that one or both of the rear wheels
are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system reduces engine power to limit
wheel spin.
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may
feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
The traction control system is enabled every time your
vehicle is started. The system will activate if it senses
that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to
lose traction.
Braking in Emergencies
You may hear or feel the system working or notice a
lack of accelerator response, but this is normal.
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
The Traction Assist System may operate on dry roads
under some conditions. When this happens, you may
notice a reduction in acceleration. This is normal
and doesn’t mean there’s a problem with your
vehicle. Examples of these conditions include a hard
acceleration in a turn, an abrupt upshift or downshift
of the transmission or driving on rough roads.
4-9
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TAS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control.
See “Cruise Control” under Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 3-7.
When the traction off light
is on, the TAS is off
and will not limit wheel
spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
• The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road.
When the vehicle leaves the rough surface, slows
down or stops, the light will go off and TAS will
be on again. This is normal.
• A Traction Assist System, Anti-Lock Brake System
or engine-related problem has been detected and
the vehicle needs service.
• If the vehicle has been driven with the TAS system
on for long periods of time, or if the vehicle has gone
through many high speed braking maneuvers the
system may be automatically disabled. The system
will automatically re-enable after approximately two
minutes of not using the brakes.
See Traction Off Light on page 3-46.
The traction off light will come on under the following
conditions:
• The Traction Assist System is turned off, either by
pressing the TAS on/off button or turning off the
automatic engagement feature of the TAS.
• The transmission is in FIRST (1); TAS will not
operate in this gear. This is normal.
4-10
The Traction Assist System, as delivered from the
factory, will automatically come on whenever you
start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, you should always leave the
system on. But you can turn the TAS off if you ever
need to. You should turn the TAS off if your vehicle
ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the
vehicle is required. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” under
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-52.
To turn the system on or
off, press the TAS on/off
button located on the
instrument panel.
3. Apply the brake pedal, shift into NEUTRAL (N),
press the accelerator pedal to the floor and then
press the TAS on/off button and hold it down for
at least six seconds.
4. Release the TAS button and both pedals.
5. Turn off the ignition and wait a few seconds.
If you used the button to turn the system off, the traction
off light will come on and stay on. You can turn the
system back on at any time by pressing the button
again. The traction off light should go off.
If desired, you can change the TAS automatic
engagement feature so that the system will not come
on automatically when the engine is started. To do so:
1. Park the vehicle with the ignition off and the
transmission in PARK (P).
The next time you start your vehicle, the TAS will not
automatically come on. You can restore the automatic
feature by using the same procedure. Whether the
TAS is set to come on automatically or not, you can
always turn the system on or off by pressing the
TAS on/off button.
Locking Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice,
sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction
and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to RUN; do not start the engine.
4-11
Stabilitrak® System
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Stabilitrak®
system which combines antilock brake, traction and
stability control systems and helps the driver maintain
directional control of the vehicle in most driving
conditions.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to
ensure there are no problems. You may hear or feel
the system working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with your vehicle. The system
should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 m.p.h.
(32 km/h). In some cases, it may take approximately
two miles of driving before the system initializes.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the STABILITY
SYS DISABLED or SERVICE STABILITY message will
be displayed. If the vehicle has gone through heavy
acceleration or braking during the first two miles after
starting your vehicle, the STABILITY SYS DISABLED
message may appear. If this is the case, your vehicle
does not need servicing. Turn your vehicle off and back
on again to reset the system. If either message appears
on the Driver Information Center (DIC), and your vehicle
hasn’t gone through hard acceleration or braking in the
first two miles, your vehicle should be taken in for service.
4-12
The STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) only when the
system is both on and activated. You may also feel or
hear the system working; this is normal. For more
information on the stability messages, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-56.
The Stabilitrak® mode
button is located on the
instrument panel.
Stabilitrak® and part of the traction control system can
be turned off or back on by pressing the Stabilitrak®
button. All-wheel drive vehicles must be in all-wheel
drive mode to turn the system on or off.
When the system is turned off, the traction off light
will illuminate, and the STABILITY SYS DISABLED
message will appear on the DIC to warn the driver
that both the stability system and part of the traction
control system are disabled. Your vehicle will still have
brake-traction control when Stabilitrak® is off, but will
not be able to use the engine speed management
system. See “Traction Control Operation” next for
more information.
When the Stabilitrak® system has been turned off
you may still hear system noises as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,
ice or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle
to attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If You Are Stuck:
In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-52.
When the transfer case is in 4 low, the stability system
is automatically disabled, and the STABILITY SYS
DISABLED message will appear on the DIC. In 4LO,
the Stabilitrak® button only turns the traction control
system on and off.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the Stabilitrak®
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine speed management)
and by applying brakes to each individual wheel
(brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when you start your vehicle, and it will activate and
display the TRACTION ACTIVE message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) if it senses that any of the
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while
driving. If you turn off Stabilitrak®, only the brake-traction
control portion of traction control will work. The engine
speed management will be disabled. In this state, engine
power is not reduced automatically and the driven wheels
can spin more freely. This can cause the brake-traction
control to activate constantly. For more information on the
traction active message, see Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 3-56.
4-13
Notice: If the traction off light comes on due to
heavy braking and/or because the traction control
system has been continuously active, do not allow
the wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively. If you
do, you may be causing damage to the transfer case.
This could lead to costly repairs not covered by
your warranty.
If the brake-traction control system activates constantly
or if the brakes have heated up due to high speed
braking, brake-traction control will be disabled, and the
TRACTION SYS LIMITED message will be displayed.
In the limited mode, the traction-control system will only
use engine traction-control and is limited in its ability
to provide optimal performance since the system will not
utilize brake traction-control to control slip on the
drive wheels. The system will return to normal operation
after the brakes have cooled. This can take up to two
minutes or longer depending on brake usage.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin
excessively while the traction off, ABS and brake
warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITY
MESSAGE are displayed, you could damage the
transfer case. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Reduce engine power and do not
spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
this message are displayed.
4-14
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a
noise or vibration. This is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will
appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC), and the
cruise control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control”
under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7
Stabilitrak® may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system.
If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction,
inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you will understand this.
Thetraction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Assist
System (TAS) on page 4-9.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions.
Under less favorable conditions you will want to
go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.
Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and
then accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-15
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you can not; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around the
problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer
around the problem, to the left or right depending on the
space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel
at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions,
you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast,
steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-16
QUADRASTEER™
The QUADRASTEER™ System has a control and
diagnostic module that monitors and records current
system status and operational information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the 4 Wheel Steer
system it has the ability to steer the vehicle with all
four wheels.
Once the 4 Wheel Steer mode is selected, it is
recommended to leave the vehicle in this mode at all
times, and during all driving and weather conditions.
You can select this mode at any speed, however, if you
are turning the system will not engage until the turn
is complete.
The 4 Wheel Steer system is equipped with three
different driving modes:
• Two wheel steering (2)
• Four wheel steering (4)
• Four wheel steering with a trailer mode (_)
The switch is located on the instrument panel.
2: In this mode the vehicle will operate like any other
vehicle with two wheel steering. If you want to use
2 wheel steer mode and your vehicle is not in this mode,
press the button until the 2 indicator, located to the
right of the 4 Wheel Steer button, lights up. If the
2 indicator is flashing you will have to center the steering
wheel by turning it to the left or right.
Your vehicle will return to 2 when the transmission is
shifted into NEUTRAL (N), for example when entering
a car wash.
If you want to use tire chains, the vehicle needs to be
in 2 wheel steer mode. For more information see
Tire Chains on page 5-81.
4-17
4: In this mode all four wheels will help steer the
vehicle. If you want to use 4, and your vehicle is not in
this mode, press the button, until the 4 indicator,
located to the right of the 4 Wheel Steer button, comes
on and stays on. If the 4 indicator is flashing you will
have to center the steering wheel by turning it to the
left or right.
Higher Speeds (40 m.p.h./64 km/h, and above)
At higher speeds the front and rear wheels will turn in
the same direction. This improves stability of the vehicle
during lane changes and sweeping turns.
Slower Speeds (below 40 m.p.h./ 64 km/h )
At slower speeds the front and rear wheels will turn in
opposite directions. This helps the vehicle make
tighter turns, such as during parking, cornering and
turning into tight spaces.
4-18
_ (4 Wheel Steer tow mode): When towing a
trailer the 4 wheel steer tow mode provides enhanced
stability allowing the trailer to follow the path of the
tow vehicle more closely, especially during lane
changes.
In this mode the system operates much like the 4 mode,
but is enhanced for trailer towing. It is recommended
for all types and weights of trailers.
To engage the 4 Wheel Steer tow mode, press the
button until the 4 and tow mode indicators light up on
the instrument panel. If the tow indicator is flashing you
will have to center the steering wheel by turning it to
the left or right. While in the 4 wheel steer tow mode,
it is possible the steering wheel may be slightly off
center. For more information, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-65.
Car Washes for QUADRASTEER™
Equipped Vehicles
Notice: Because your vehicle has a wider rear
track a small number of older car washes may be
too narrow for your vehicle. Conveyor systems
on some automatic car washes may damage your
vehicle. Only use conveyor system car washes
with 13-inch (33 cm) wide conveyor rails and/or
stationary washes with at least 82 inches (208 cm)
between the rails. Before using the car wash
check with the manager.
4-19
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with
the worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up
to one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.
4-20
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass,
wait for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will
have a “running start” that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping back.
And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down and
drop back again and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in
your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
(Remember that if your right outside mirror is
convex, the vehicle you just passed may seem to
be farther away from you than it really is.)
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
4-21
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Traction Assist System, remember:
It helps avoid only the acceleration skid. If you do not
have this system, or if the system is off, then an
acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking
(including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear).
Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-22
Off-Road Driving
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel
drive or all-wheel drive. Also, see Braking on page 4-6.
If your vehicle does not have four-wheel drive or
all-wheel drive, you should not drive off-road unless
you are on a level, solid surface.
If you think you will need some more ground clearance
at the front of your vehicle, you can easily remove
the front bumper lower air dam.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not
marked. Curves are not banked. There are no
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that
is why it is very important that you read this guide.
You will find many driving tips and suggestions.
These will help make your off-road driving safer and
more enjoyable.
The front bumper lower air dam is held in place by a
series of push-pins located around the lower edge of
the front bumper. The push-pins are accessible
from underneath the front bumper.
4-23
The following steps must be performed on each of the
push-pins to remove the air dam:
1. Insert a tool into the
push-pin slot and pull
downward until the
push-pin snaps loose.
3. Pull the push-pins and
lower air dam assembly
away from the retainers
until the lower air dam
is free.
When you are back on roads, though, be sure to
replace the air dam.
2. While continuing to
pull downward on the
push-pin, squeeze
and turn the
expandable end of the
push-pin with a tool
until it releases
from the retainer.
4-24
Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended
periods without the front bumper lower air dam
installed can cause improper air flow to the engine
and may allow things like fog lamps or tow hooks
on the front of your vehicle to be damaged. Always
be sure to replace the front bumper air dam when
you are finished off-road driving.
To reinstall the lower air dam do the following:
1. Line up each push-pin
with its intended
retainer and push the
washer portion of
the push-pin towards
the retainer until it locks
into place.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out.
For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly
attached. Be sure you read all the information about
your four-wheel-drive or all-wheel-drive vehicle in
this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully
inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should
be? What are the local laws that apply to off-roading
where you will be driving? If you do not know, you
should check with law enforcement people in the area.
Will you be on someone’s private land? If so, be sure
to get the necessary permission.
2. Push the flat end of the
push-pin towards the
retainer until it locks into
place, making sure
each is secure.
4-25
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
•
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
CAUTION:
4-26
(Continued)
You will find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58 and Tires
on page 5-62.
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads and areas that
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment — shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses —
or disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground).
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch
can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know
how to use it properly.
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where
permitted), camp stoves and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-27
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes,
for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain for
unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for
unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands,
feet and body, you will need to respond to vibrations and
vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
• you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• you have less time to react.
• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• you will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
4-28
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you’re
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking
distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There is more discussion of these subjects later.)
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain,
keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.
At the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can
be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if
you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has
been drinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-3.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you can not control the
vehicle as well or at all.
4-29
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and
can not do. There are some hills that simply can not be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
On a very small hill, for example, there may be a
smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to
the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as
you near the top, but you may not see this because the
crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
{CAUTION:
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you can not control your speed.
If you drive across them, you will roll over.
You could be seriously injured or killed. If you
have any doubt about the steepness, do not
drive the hill.
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb,
descend or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge.
4-30
sharply steeper in places?
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want your wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use your headlamps even during the day.
They make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
4-31
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, and I can not make it up the hill?
A:
If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here is what you should do:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking
brake.
• If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in
REVERSE (R).
4-32
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way, you will be able to tell if your wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is
best that you back down the hill with your wheels
straight rather than in the left or right direction.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill.
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to “rev-up” the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,
and slowly back straight down.
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the
hill and decide I just can not do it. What should
I do?
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). This is because
the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case
overrides the transmission. You or someone
else could be injured. If you are going to leave
your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift
the transmission to PARK (P). But do not shift
the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
A:
Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle
would take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL when you leave
the vehicle. Leave it in some gear.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you can
not make it up the hill, you must back straight
down the hill.
4-33
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they will not have to do all the work. Descend
slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A:
•
•
Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across.
You could roll over if you do not drive straight down.
Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”
Your brakes will have to do all the work and
could overheat and fade.
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here is what to do.
{CAUTION:
• Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade.
This could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
• Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart the
Apply the parking brake.
4-34
engine.
• Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
• If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline.
Here are some things to consider:
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight
up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base
(the distance from the front wheels to the rear
wheels) reduces the likelihood the vehicle will
tumble end over end. But when you drive across
an incline, the much more narrow track width
(the distance between the left and right wheels)
may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling
over. Also, driving across an incline puts more
weight on the downhill wheels. This could cause a
downhill slide or a rollover.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you
drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,
or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip
sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways,
it can hit something that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.)
and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
A:
If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
4-35
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you
get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
4-36
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous.
If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed
or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high)
side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the
rollover path.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels
will not get good traction. You can not accelerate
as quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need
longer braking distances.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you
do not get stuck.
{CAUTION:
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on
beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink into
the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating
and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can
be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken
the ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice
and you and your passengers could drown.
Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
4-37
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,
axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will
not get through. Also, water that deep can damage
your axle and other vehicle parts.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.
At faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your
tailpipe is under water, you will never be able to start your
engine. When you go through water, remember that when
your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
{CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown. If it is only shallow water,
CAUTION:
4-38
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
it can still wash away the ground from under
your tires, and you could lose traction and roll
the vehicle over. Do not drive through rushing
water.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-40 for
more information on driving through water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
Driving at Night
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you can not see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you are driving,
do not wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things
invisible.
4-39
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare (as from a
driver who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle
with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should
be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
4-40
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can not stop, accelerate or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer
fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they
show signs of streaking or missing areas on the
windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can not, try to slow down before
you hit them.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-41
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle
can be carried away. As little as six inches
of flowing water can carry away a smaller
vehicle. If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you can not avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
4-42
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps – not just your
•
•
parking lamps – to help make you more visible to
others.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-62.
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for
a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-44.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-43
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-44
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain
you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to
the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-45
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on
the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of
the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle
can leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-46
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-Road
Driving on page 4-23 for information about driving
off-road.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have your engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
{CAUTION:
•
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
•
•
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate
action.
4-47
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles.
And, if you will be driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or
a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction.
Be sure you properly secure these items in your
vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You will have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need
to be very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-48
slippery road. But you can turn the traction system off
if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow.
See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-52. Even though your vehicle has a traction
system, you will want to slow down and adjust your
driving to the road conditions. See Traction Assist
System (TAS) on page 4-9.
If you do not have a traction system, accelerate gently.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system,
you will want to begin stopping sooner than you would
on dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.
What is the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow — drive with caution.
If you have traction assist, keep the system on. It will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can not reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads are
clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake
before you are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
4-49
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
4-50
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can not see it or smell it, so you might
not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow
from around the base of your vehicle, especially
any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
does not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and
do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or
so until help comes.
4-51
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you are stuck,
but you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other parts
of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause
an engine compartment fire or other damage.
CAUTION:
4-52
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as
little as possible. Do not spin the wheels
above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-81.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into 4HI or 4LO. If your
vehicle has the Traction Assist System, you should turn
it off by pressing the TAS on/off button. If your vehicle
has the Stabilitrak® System, turn the Stabilitrak® System
off by pressing the Stabilitrak® button so that the
STABILITY SYSTEM DISABLED and TRACTION OFF
lights are illuminated on the instrument panel cluster.
Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission
is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that may free your vehicle. If that does not get
you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
Or, you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle
has them. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-55.
Using the Recovery Hooks
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.
The hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle.
You may need to use them if you are stuck off-road
and need to be pulled to some place where you
can continue driving.
4-53
{CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.
The hooks could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it
would not be covered by warranty.
4-54
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing, towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground, and dolly towing,
towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing”, following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-45.
4-55
Dinghy Towing
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle
to roll even if the transmission is in Park (P).
You or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles (NR4 and NP8)
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
4-56
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28 for the proper
procedure to select the NEUTRAL (N) position for
your vehicle.
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle.
7. Turn the ignition off and leave the steering column
unlocked.
Dolly Towing
Two-wheel-drive vehicles can be towed on a dolly with
the front wheels on the ground provided that the wheels
are straight and the steering column has been locked.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
If your vehicle is equipped with Stabilitrak® it is not
designed to be dolly towed. If you need to tow your
vehicle, see “Dinghy Towing” earlier in this section.
If your vehicle is not equipped with Stabilitrak®,
use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Drive the vehicle up onto the tow dolly.
2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
3. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow dolly.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
4-57
Loading Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle
to roll even if the transmission is in Park (P).
You or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
6. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28 for the proper
procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for
your vehicle.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition off and lock the steering column.
4-58
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
This label lists the number of people that can be in your
vehicle and the total weight it can carry. This weight
is called the vehicle capacity weight.
The Tire and Loading Information label also tells you
the size and recommended inflation pressure for
the original equipment tires on your vehicle. For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-62
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-71.
If your vehicle does not have the Tire and Loading
Information label, the Certification/Tire label shows the
tire size and recommended inflation pressures
needed to obtain the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
the front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
The Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the center pillar, near the driver’s door latch. Vehicles
without a center pillar will have the Tire and Loading
Information label attached to the driver’s door edge.
4-59
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer on page 4-65 for more
information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules
and trailering tips.
4-60
Example 1
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1=
B
Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
C
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
700 lbs (317 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Example 2
Example 3
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
Loading Your Vehicle
Total
Item
Description
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
B
Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) x 5 =
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant Weight
200 lbs (91 kg) x 5 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
C
Available Cargo Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Available Cargo Weight =
0 lbs. (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-61
Certification/Tire Label
The label shows the size of your original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
The Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of
the driver’s door or in the Incomplete Vehicle
Document in the cab.
4-62
The Certification/Tire label also contains information
about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity. See “Front
Axle Reserve Capacity” later in this section.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
The label will help you decide how much cargo and
installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
If you put things inside your vehicle – like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else – they go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See ″Loading Your Vehicle
for Off-Road Driving″ in the Index.
4-63
Level Control
Autoride™
Automatic Level Control
If equipped, the Autoride™ feature will provide a
superior vehicle ride and handling under a variety of
passenger and loading conditions.
The automatic level control rear suspension is available
on C/K 1500 vehicles and comes as a part of the
Autoride™ suspension, if equipped.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well as better
handling under a variety of passenger and loading
conditions. An air compressor connected to the rear
shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle
to maintain proper vehicle height. The system is
activated when the ignition key is turned to RUN and
will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter.
The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for
up to ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned
off. You may hear the air compressor operating when
the height is being adjusted.
If a self-equalizing hitch is being used, it is
recommended to allow the shocks to inflate, thereby
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch.
4-64
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel
to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the
vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock
absorber to independently adjust the damping level to
provide the optimum vehicle ride.
Autoride™ also interacts with the tow/haul switch that,
when engaged, will provide additional control of the
shock absorbers. This additional control results in better
ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is
loaded or towing a trailer. See Tow/Haul Mode Light on
page 3-54 for more information.
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo
Weight Rating (CWR) for your vehicle. CWR is the
maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry.
It doesn’t include the weight of the people inside.
But you can figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat.
The total cargo load must not be more than your
vehicle’s CWR.
Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, so that you
won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you are using
a weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without the
spring bars in place.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-65
Towing a Trailer.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
To identify the vehicle trailering capacity of your vehicle,
you should read the information in “Weight of the
Trailer” that appears later in this section.
4-65
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in acceleration, braking, handling, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
4-66
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts
too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions). See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in
this section.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• The weight on your vehicle’s tires
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. The purpose of the
Tow/Haul mode is to:
• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a button at the end
of the shift lever which, when pressed, enables
tow/haul. Your vehicle may be equipped with
Autoride™ ® which further improves your vehicle’s ride
while towing. See Autoride™ on page 4-64 for more
information. When the button is pressed, a light on
the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that
Tow/Haul has been selected. Tow/Haul may be turned
off by pressing the button again, at which time the
indicator light on the instrument panel will turn off.
The vehicle will automatically turn off Tow/Haul every
time it is started.
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of
the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
See Weight of the Trailer later in this section.
Tow/Haul is most useful under the following driving
conditions:
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load through rolling terrain.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in stop and go traffic.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in busy parking lots where improved low
speed control of the vehicle is desired.
Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded or
with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when the
vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving
characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul
is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load.
4-67
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Use one of the following charts to determine how much
your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle
model and options.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. And, it can also depend on any special
equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Vehicle*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
3.42
3.73
5,700 lbs. (2 585 kg)
6,700 lbs. (3 039 kg)
11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)
12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg)
5300 V8
3.42
3.73
6,700 lbs. (3 039 kg)
7,700 lbs. (3 492 kg)
12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg)
13,000 lbs. (5 897 kg)
5300 V8
(Extended Models)
3.73
4.10
7,400 lbs. (3 356 kg)
8,400 lbs. (3 810 kg)
13,000 lbs. (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs. (6 350 kg)
C-1500 (2WD)*
4800 V8
4-68
Vehicle*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
3.73
4.10
6,400 lbs. (2 902 kg)
7,400 lbs. (3 356 kg)
12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg)
13,000 lbs. (5 897 kg)
5300 V8
3.73
4.10
7,500 lbs. (3 401 kg)
7,800 lbs. (3 538 kg)
13,000 lbs. (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs. (6 350 kg)
5300 V8
(Extended Models)
3.73
4.10
7,200 lbs. (3 265 kg)
8,200 lbs. (3 719 kg)
13,000 lbs. (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs. (6 350 kg)
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
3.73
4.10
7,900 lbs. (3 583 kg)
9,900 lbs. (4 490 kg)
14,000 lbs. (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs. (7 257 kg)**
6000 V8 w/4WS**
3.73
4.10
7,600 lbs. (3447 kg)
9,600 lbs. (4354 kg)
14,000 lbs. (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs. (7 257 kg)
8100 V8
(Extended Models)†
3.73
4.10
10,500 lbs. (4 762 kg)
12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg)
17,000 lbs. (7 711 kg)
19,000 lbs. (8 618 kg)
K-1500 (4 WD)*
4800 V8
Vehicle*
C-2500 (2WD)*
6000 V8
(Extended Models)**†
**GCWR limited to 14,000 lbs. (6 356 kg) on extended models with Z83 suspension.
†2500 extended models (2WD) equipped with Z83 suspension limited to 7,900 lbs. (3 583 kg) trailer.
4-69
Vehicle*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
K-2500 (4WD)*
6000 V8
(Extended Models)**†
3.73
4.10
7,600 lbs. (3 447 kg)
9,600 lbs. (4 354kg)
14,000 lbs. (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs. (7 257 kg)**
6000 V8 w/4WS
3.73
4.10
7,300 lbs. (3 311 kg)
9,300 lbs. (4 218 kg)
14,000 lbs. (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs. (7 257 kg)
8100 V8**†
3.73
4.10
10,200 lbs. (4 626 kg)
12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg)
17,000 lbs. (7 711 kg)
19,000 lbs. (8 618 kg)
**GCWR limited to 14,000 lbs. (6 356 kg) on extended models with Z83 suspension.
†2500 Extended Models (4WD) equipped with Z83 base suspension limited to 7,900 lbs. (3 586 kg) trailer.
The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is
the total allowable weight of the completely loaded
vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo,
equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle
should not be exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
4-70
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue
load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle for more
information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to
a maximum or 600 lbs. (272 kg) for the 1500 series,
and up to a maximum of 600 lbs. (272 kg) for the
2500 series with a weight carrying hitch. The trailer
tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to 15 percent
of the total loaded trailer weight, up to a maximum
of 1,000 lbs. (453 kg) for the 1500 series and up to a
maximum of 1,500 lbs. (680 kg) for the 2500 series
with a weight distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
on the rear axle.
After you have loaded the trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they are not, you may be able to get
them right by moving some items around in the trailer.
4-71
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on
the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s
door or see Loading Your Vehicle for more information.
Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for
your vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight of the
trailer tongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch,
make sure you don’t go over the rear axle limit before
you apply the weight distribution spring bars.
Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch.
(A) Body to Ground Distance (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.
If you use a step-bumper hitch, the bumper could
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample
room when turning to avoid contact between the
trailer and the bumper.
4-72
If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when driving. Always use a sway control if the trailer
will weigh more than these limits. You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
Safety Chains
You should always attach safety chains between your
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains
under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue
from contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch.
If you are towing a trailer up to 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) with
a factory-installed step bumper, you may attach the
safety chains to the attaching points on the bumper.
If you are towing a trailer up to your vehicle’s trailer
rating limit, you may attach the safety chains to
the attaching point on the hitch platform. If you are
towing with an aftermarket hitch, following the trailer or
hitch manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains. Always leave just enough slack so you
can turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag
on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
If your vehicle is equipped with Stabilitrak®, your trailer
cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system.
Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
• The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inches (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap at
the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid
to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this.
If you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steel
brake tubing.
4-73
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide
(CO) could come into your vehicle. You can not
see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness
or death. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-40.
To maximize your safety when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main heating
or cooling system on and with the fan on
any speed. This will bring fresh, outside air
into your vehicle. Do not use the climate
control setting for maximum air because it
only recirculates the air inside your vehicle.
See Climate Control System on page 3-22.
4-74
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good
deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
If your vehicle is equipped with four-wheel steering and
if you use it while backing your trailer the same rules
apply. However, with four-wheel steering your rig
will respond more quickly and it may take additional
practice to get used to backing up with four-wheel
steering.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-75
Driving On Grades
Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
{CAUTION:
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the
transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
earlier in this section for more information.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do
get the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-29.
4-76
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,
here’s how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brake, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
NEUTRAL.
6. Release the regular brakes.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set.
If the transfer case on four-wheel-drive vehicles
is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in NEUTRAL.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-77
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle is equipped with the following wiring
harnesses for towing a trailer.
Basic Trailer Wiring
The trailer wiring harness, with a seven-pin connector,
is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to
the vehicle’s frame. The harness connector can be
plugged into a seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer
connector available through your dealer.
4-78
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Red: Battery Feed
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness
Package
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Red: Battery Feed
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
If your trailer is equipped with electronic brakes, you
can get a jumper harness (electric trailer brake control)
with a trailer battery feed fuse from your dealer.
This harness and fuse should be installed by your
dealer or a qualified service center.
Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal
trailer connector is attached to a bracket on the hitch
platform.
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way round pin connector, you can also get an
adapter.
4-79
Instrument Panel Jumper Wiring Harness
{CAUTION:
Be sure to use only the correct trailer brake
harness, the one intended for use on your
vehicle. If you use some other trailer brake
harness, even if it seems to fit, your trailer
brakes may not work at all. You could have a
crash in which you or others could be injured.
Use only the trailer brake harness intended for
your vehicle. If it is no longer available to you,
be sure to get a proper replacement from your
dealer.
This harness is included with your vehicle as part of the
heavy-duty trailer wiring package.
This harness is for an electric brake controller and
includes a trailer battery feed fuse. It should be installed
by your dealer or a qualified service center.
This harness is new for your vehicle, and you will not be
able to use a harness from an earlier model year.
4-80
Four-Wire Harness Adapter
This adapter is included
with your vehicle as part of
the heavy-duty trailer
wiring package.
Use this adapter to connect a standard four-way round
pin connector to the seven-wire harness on your vehicle.
Connect the adapter with the tab pointing up (see arrow).
The flip cap on the vehicle’s seven-wire harness will lock
onto the tab and help hold the adapter in place. Plug the
four-way round pin connector onto the adapter.
4-81
Power Winches
If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only
use it when your vehicle is stationary or anchored.
Step-Bumper Pad
Your vehicle has a rear step bumper with a rear step
pad at the center of the bumper.
If you will be using the
bumper to tow a trailer,
and your step-bumper has
three cutout circles you
must push out the center
cutout circle to install
the trailer ball.
If your step-bumper has only one cutout circle, you will
have to cut out the circle, then remove it to install
the trailer ball.
4-82
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle ...........................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-4
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-4
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-5
Fuel E-85 (85% Ethanol) .................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-8
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-16
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-21
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-23
Engine Coolant .............................................5-26
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-29
Engine Overheating .......................................5-29
Cooling System ............................................5-31
Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-38
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-38
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-40
Brakes ........................................................5-41
Battery ........................................................5-44
Jump Starting ...............................................5-45
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-51
Rear Axle .......................................................5-52
Four-Wheel Drive ............................................5-53
Front Axle ......................................................5-54
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-55
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-55
Headlamps ..................................................5-55
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps .............................5-56
Side Identification Marker Lamps .....................5-57
Roof Marker Lamps ......................................5-58
Taillamps .....................................................5-59
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-60
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-61
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tires ..............................................................5-62
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-71
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-72
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-74
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-76
Buying New Tires .........................................5-76
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-78
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-79
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-79
Tire Chains ..................................................5-81
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-82
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-83
Spare Tire .................................................5-101
Appearance Care ..........................................5-102
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ...............5-102
Care of Safety Belts ....................................5-105
Weatherstrips .............................................5-105
5-2
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............5-105
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-108
Finish Damage ...........................................5-108
Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-108
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-108
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-109
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-110
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-110
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-110
Electrical System ..........................................5-110
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-110
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-111
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-111
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-111
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-120
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-11.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-86.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-17.
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-3
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Fuel
Gasoline
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
•
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
5-4
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-110.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code Z only),
you may use either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol
fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E-85); also see
Fuel E-85 (85% Ethanol) on page 5-6. In all other
engines, including the 5.3L V8 (VIN Code T), use only
regular unleaded gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of
87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine.
A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is
considered normal. This does not indicate a problem
exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If you are
using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
California Fuel
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide
Fuel Charter which is available from the Alliance
of Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-50 )
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
Additives
Canada Only
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to
your fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
5-5
General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines
that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems
due to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand
of gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available
in your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
5-6
Fuel E-85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-110.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code Z
only), you may use either regular unleaded gasoline or
ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E-85);
also see Fuel on page 5-4. In all other engines, including
the 5.3L V8 (VIN Code T), use only regular unleaded
gasoline.
Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code Z)
may use 85% ethanol fuel (E-85). General Motors
encourages the use of E-85 in vehicles that are designed
to use it. The ethanol in E-85 is a “renewable” fuel,
meaning it is made from renewable sources such as
corn and other crops.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E-85) pump available. The U.S. Department
of Energy has an alternative fuels website
(http://afdcmap.nrel.gov/nrel/) that can help you find
E-85 fuel. Those stations that do have E-85 should have
a label indicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel
if the ethanol content is greater than 85%. Your vehicle
may not operate properly if the ethanol content is
greater than 85%.
A a minimum, E-85 should meet ASTM
Specification D 5798.
To insure quick starts in the wintertime, the E-85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble
starting on E-85, it may be because your E-85 fuel is
not properly formulated for your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to your fuel
tank may improve starting. Your vehicle is designed to
accommodate a mixture of gasoline and E-85 fuel.
For good starting and heater efficiency below 32°F
(0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no
more than 70% ethanol.
E-85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you will
need to refill your fuel tank more often when using E-85
than when you are using gasoline. Regular unleaded
gasoline is recommended when pulling a trailer.
For payload capacity with ethanol fuel, see Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-58.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
E-85 fuel and may harm your fuel system. Damage
caused by additives would not be covered by
your new vehicle warranty. Do not use additives
with E-85 fuel.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by
your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact
a major oil company that does business in the country
where you will be driving.
(Continued)
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle — this is against the law
in some places. Keep children away from the
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
While refueling, hang the
fuel cap by the tether using
the hook located on the
inside of the filler door.
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames and smoking materials away from fuel.
CAUTION:
5-8
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). It will require more effort to turn
the fuel cap on the last turn as you loosen it.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Don’t top off or overfill your
tank and wait a few seconds after you’ve finished
pumping before you remove the nozzle. Clean any
spilled fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible.
See Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-105.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. It will require
more effort to turn the fuel cap on the last turn as
you tighten it. Make sure you fully install the cap.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. this would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-50.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and
may damage your fuel tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-50.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury
to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood do the following:
1. Pull the handle inside
the vehicle located
under and to the left of
the steering wheel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on
the secondary hood release located near the
center of the grill.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are
on properly. Pull down the hood and close it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the VORTEC™ 5300 V8 engine (VORTEC™ 4800 and 6000 V8 engines similar),
you’ll see the following:
5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
B. Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-31.
C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped).
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-23.
F. Engine Oil Fill. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
G. Fan. See Cooling System on page 5-31.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND).
See Jump Starting on page 5-45.
I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-38.
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-45.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Brakes on
page 5-41.
L. Underhood Fuse Block. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-111.
M. Battery. See Battery on page 5-44.
N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-40.
5-13
When you open the hood on the VORTEC™ 8100 V8 engine you’ll see the following:
5-14
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
B. Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-31.
C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped).
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-23.
F. Engine Oil Fill. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
G. Fan. See Cooling System on page 5-31.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND).
See Jump Starting on page 5-45.
I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-45.
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-38.
K. Brake Master Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes on
page 5-41.
L. Underhood Fuse Block. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-111.
M. Battery. See Battery on page 5-44.
N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-40.
5-15
Engine Oil
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on the
instrument cluster, it means you need to check
your engine oil level right away.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
For more information, see “CHECK OIL LEVEL” under
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-68.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
8.1L Engine
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show the actual level.
5-16
All Other Engines
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, then you will need to add at least one
quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-120.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-17
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-18
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle. However, if it is going to be 0°F
(–18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not available,
you may use SAE 10W-30.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-19
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System)
How to Reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
Message
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on,
reset the system.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will
come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil
life system may not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has
GM-trained service people who will perform this
work using genuine GM parts and reset the system.
It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep
it at the proper level.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message,
see “GM Oil Life System” under DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-56 for vehicles equipped with
the DIC, or do the following:
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-20
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within five seconds.
If the OIL LIFE RESET message flashes for
10 seconds, the system is resetting.
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure. If it still does
not reset, see your dealer for service.
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting
it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your
dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for location of engine
air cleaner/filter and
change indicator
(if equipped).
When to Inspect
If your vehicle is equipped with a filter change indicator
it lets you know when the filter needs to be replaced.
Vehicles with a restriction indicator, inspect the air
cleaner/filter at every oil change and replace the filter
when the indicator tells you to. Vehicles without a
change indicator, inspect the air cleaner/filter at every
oil change and replace it at the first oil change after
25,000 miles (40 000 km).
5-21
How to Inspect
Locate the filter change indicator. When the change
indicator turns black or is in the red/orange “change”
zone, replace the filter and reset the indicator. To inspect
the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the vehicle and
lightly shake filter to release loose dust and dirt. If the
filter remains “caked” with dirt, a new filter is required.
To inspect and replace the filter and reset the indicator
(if equipped), do the following:
1. Loosen the screws on the cover of the housing
and lift up the cover.
2. Remove the air cleaner/filter from the housing. Care
should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible.
3. Clean the filter sealing surface and the housing.
4. Install the new engine air cleaner/filter.
5. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
The air cleaner/filter assembly is located on the front
corner of the engine compartment on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
5-22
6. Reset the filter change indicator, if equipped,
by pressing the top button on the indicator.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps
to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage
it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you are driving.
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8,600 or if
the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If your vehicle’s GVWR is not over 8,600 and you do
not use your vehicle under any of these conditions,
change the fluid and filter every 100,000 miles
(166 000 km).
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
5-23
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic – especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
5-24
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C),
you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check
the fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission dipstick
handle with the graphic is
located at the rear of
the engine compartment,
on the passenger’s side.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or
in the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a
hot check. Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed
down to get an accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-25
How to Add Fluid
Engine Coolant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-29.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.)
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot
check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON®-III
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under How to Check.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-26
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F ( −37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
5-27
Checking Coolant
The coolant surge tank is
located in the engine
compartment on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FULL COLD mark.
If your vehicle is equipped with a low coolant sensor,
and the LOW COOLANT LEVEL message comes
on and stays on, it means you’re low on engine coolant.
See “Low Coolant Level” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-68.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
5-28
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for more information
on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s
instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 3-47. In addition, you will find an ENGINE
OVERHEATED, and a REDUCED ENGINE POWER
message in the DIC on the instrument panel. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-56.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode (V8 Engines Only)
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed,
an overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.
In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. This operating mode allows your vehicle
to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the
cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the
oil life system. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
5-29
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:
(Continued)
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” under Engine Overheating on page 5-29
for information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
CAUTION:
5-30
(Continued)
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” under Engine
Overheating on page 5-29 for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant condition,
can indicate a serious problem. See Low Coolant
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-68.
If you get an engine overheat warning with and do not
have a low coolant condition, but see or hear no steam,
the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the
engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-65.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in neutral while
stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road.
Shift to park or neutral and let the engine idle.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as
fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off
the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down. Also, seeOverheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode listed previously in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
5-31
8100 V8 Engines
All Other Engines
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
5-32
The coolant level should
be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it isn’t,
you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when
idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service.
Turn off the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
5-33
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level isn’t at or above the FULL
COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
surge tank, but be sure the cooling system, including
the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you
do it. See Engine Coolant on page 5-26 for more
information.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly.
They are under pressure, and if you turn the
coolant surge tank pressure cap — even a
little — they can come out at high speed.
CAUTION:
5-34
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Never turn the cap when the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant
surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-35
1. Park the vehicle on a
level surface. You can
remove the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling
system, including
the coolant surge tank
pressure cap and
upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot.
2. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise (left)
about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
3. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-36
4. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the FULL COLD mark.
6. Then replace the
pressure cap. Be sure
the pressure cap is
hand-tight and
fully seated.
5. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5-37
Engine Fan Noise
Power Steering Fluid
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the
clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air
to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions,
the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully
engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces fan
noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or
high outside temperatures, the fan speed increases as
the clutch more fully engages. So you may hear an
increase in fan noise. This is normal and should not be
mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra
shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning properly.
The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not
required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
5-38
8100 Engines
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
All Other Engines
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-39
Windshield Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer
fluid until the tank is full.
What to Use
Notice:
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against freezing. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Adding Washer Fluid
Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message that
comes on when the washer fluid is low. The message is
displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition
cycle. When the CHECK WASHER FLUID message is
displayed, you will need to add washer fluid to the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
The windshield washer
fluid reservoir is located in
the engine compartment
toward the front of the
vehicle on the driver’s side.
5-40
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is,
you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
5-41
Checking Brake Fluid
What to Add
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it is not, have your brake
system checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
5-42
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
See Appearance Care on page 5-102.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come
and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving
(except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
5-43
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
GM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may
5-44
no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco® battery. When it is time for a new battery,
get one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
If your battery (or batteries) has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to
start your vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below
to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-45
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-137.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
5-45
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put the automatic
transmission in PARK (P) before setting the parking
brake. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in
NEUTRAL.
5-46
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or in the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all the lamps that aren’t needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations of the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. You should always use these
remote terminals instead of the terminals on the
battery.
The remote positive (+) terminal is located behind
a red plastic cover, if equipped, near the engine
accessory drive bracket. To uncover the remote
positive (+) terminal, open the red plastic cover,
if equipped.
The remote negative (−) terminal is located on
the engine drive bracket, or on the thermostat
housing on the 8.1L engine. It is marked ″GND.″
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care
of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the ACDelco® battery
installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right amount of
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
(Continued)
5-47
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you’ll
get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And don’t connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use
a remote positive (+)
terminal if the
vehicle has one.
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
5-48
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (−) cable.
Use a remote
negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal part of the vehicle with
the dead battery, or to the remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
9. Connect the other end
of the negative (−)
cable to the remote
negative (−) terminal,
marked GND, on
the vehicle with the
dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and
run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-49
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the bad battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) remote terminal cover to its
original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-50
All-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems
that need lubrication.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
Transfer Case
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
When to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-13.
How to Check Lubricant
All-Wheel Drive Transfer Case
(A) Fill Plug (B) Drain Plug
5-51
Rear Axle
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
When to Check Lubricant
The proper level for the 1500 Series is from 5/8 inch to
1 5/8 inch (15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom of the filler
plug hole. The proper level for the 2500 Series is from
0 to 1/2 inch (0 to 13 mm) below the bottom of the filler
plug hole. The proper level for the 1500 and 2500 series
vehicles with QUADRASTEER™ (4 Wheel Steer) is from
0 to 1/4 inch (0 to 6 mm) below the filler plug hole.
Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
1500 Series shown, 2500 similar
5-52
Four-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems that
need lubrication.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
Transfer Case
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
When to Check Lubricant
When to Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak, or you hear an
unusual noice. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspeced and repaired.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Automatic Transfer Case
5-53
Front Axle
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
When to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you may need to add some lubricant.
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 0 to 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
5-54
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
See Replacement Bulbs on page 5-60 for the proper
types of bulbs to use.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
1. Your vehicle is equipped with two pins, remove the
two pins on the top of the headlamp assembly.
To remove the pins, turn the outer pin outward and
pull it straight up. To remove the inner pin, turn
it in and pull it straight up.
5-55
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps
A. Low-Beam Headlamp
B. High-Beam Headlamp
2. Pull the headlamp assembly out.
3. Unplug the electrical connector.
4. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and remove it
from the headlamp assembly.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Sidemarker Lamp
Retainer Clip
Front Turn Signal Lamp
Daytime Running Lamp
5. Put the new bulb into the assembly and turn it
clockwise until it is tight. Use care not to touch
the bulb with your fingers or hands.
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as mentioned
previously.
6. Plug in the electrical connector.
2. Press the retainer clip, located behind the turn
signal housing, towards the outside of the vehicle.
7. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
Install and tighten the two pins.
5-56
3. Pull the turn signal housing out from the vehicle.
Side Identification Marker Lamps
4. Press the locking release lever, turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove the socket from the
turn signal housing.
1. To expose the service slot, locate the lamp gasket
near the rear wheel, and pull back the edge.
5. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket.
2. Using a flat tool, push into the slot to release the
lamp housing.
6. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket. Use care not
to touch the bulb with your fingers or hands.
7. Put the bulb socket into the turn signal housing and
turn it clockwise until it locks.
8. Reinstall the turn signal housing onto the vehicle,
placing the hook and posts on the inner side into
the alignment holes, and the outer side into
the retainer bracket. Push until you hear a click.
3. Pull the housing out to expose the wiring harness
and connector.
4. Unplug the lamp assembly harness from the
housing.
5. Unplug the lamp.
6. Put in a new lamp and snap it into the housing.
7. Reinstall the lamp housing.
9. Reinstall the headlamp assembly.
5-57
Roof Marker Lamps
1. Remove the two
screws and lift off
the lens.
2. Remove the six screws on the center roof marker
lamps.
3. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise to remove it
from the socket.
5-58
4. Put a new bulb into
the socket and turn
clockwise until it locks
in place.
Taillamps
A. Turn Signal Lamp
B. Back-up Lamp
C. Stoplamp
1. Use a tool to remove
the two screws from
the lamp assembly.
5. Reinstall the lens and tighten the screws.
5-59
2. Remove the lamp assembly.
3. Press the release tab and turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp
housing.
4. Pull the old bulb
straight out from
the socket.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Low-Beam Headlamps
9006
High-Beam Headlamps
9005
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
4114K
Front Roof Marker Lamp
194
Front Parking and Turn Lamp
3457A
Rear Marker Lamp, Taillamp and
Stop Lamp
3157
Rear Turn Lamp
3157
Back-up Lamp
3157
For any bulb not listed here contact your dealer.
5. Press a new bulb into the socket, insert the socket
into the taillamp housing and turn the socket
clockwise into the taillamp housing until it clicks.
6. Reinstall the rear lamp assembly.
5-60
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-15.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the
following:
1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is
facing away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-61
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
CAUTION:
5-62
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a
typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size Code: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size Code” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) Department of Transportation (DOT): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
P-Metric Tire
5-63
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information,
see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-78.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-71 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.
LT-Metric Tire
5-64
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used in a dual configuration.
For information on recommended tire pressure see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-71 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-58.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used as a single. For information
on recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-71 and Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-58.
(D) Department of Transportation (DOT): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
5-65
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
if the tire size aspect ratio is “75,” as shown in item “C”
of the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 75% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
“R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
5-66
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire.
The load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from “A” to “Z”.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
if the tire size aspect ratio is “75,” as shown in item “C”
of the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 75% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
“R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “LT” as
the first two characters in the tire size means a light
truck tire engineered to standards set by the U. S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire.
The load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from “A” to “Z”. The light truck tire size example
above shows dual or single tire configurations.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
5-67
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
5-68
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-71.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can
also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-58.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants
a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds
(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that faces outward
when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand and or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-71 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
5-69
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When It
Is Time for New Tires on page 5-76.
5-70
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards,
a tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-78.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-58.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation pressure. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-58.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
When to Check
The tire and loading information label, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58, for the location
of your vehicle’s tire and loading information label.
Check your tires once a month or more.
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Bad wear
• Bad handling
• Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Bad handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are
cold. cold means your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
5-71
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
If your vehicle has this feature, sensors are mounted
on each tire and wheel assembly, except the spare tire.
The TPM sensors transmit tire pressure readings to
a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPM
system will display the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
warning message on the Driver Information Center
(DIC); and at the same time illuminate the low tire
pressure warning symbol. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-56 and DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-68.
When the tire pressure
monitoring system warning
light is lit, one or more
of your tires is significantly
under-inflated.
You should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each
tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly
when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure
as specified in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual.
The Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading
Information label (tire information placard) shows the
size of your vehicle’s original tires and the correct
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they
are cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-71.
For the location of the tire and loading information label,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.
Your vehicle’s TPM system can alert you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 and Tires on page 5-62.
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle is
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid
sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor
sensors.
5-72
TPM Sensor Identification Codes
Each TPM sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one
or more of the TPM sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
Each tire/wheel position is matched to a sensor,
by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressure.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: left front (LF); right front (RF);
right rear (RR) and left rear (LR).
You will have one minute to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than one minute,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than five
minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the
matching process stops and you will need to start over.
The TPM sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the Parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with the engine off.
3. Turn the exterior lamp switch from “Off” to “On”
four times within 3 seconds. A double horn chirp
will sound and the TPM low tire warning light
will begin to flash. The double horn chirp and
flashing TPM warning light indicate that the TPM
matching process has started. The TPM warning
light should continue flashing throughout the
matching procedure. The SERVICE TIRE
MONITOR message will be displayed on the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
4. Start with the left (driver’s side) front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPM sensor by increasing or decreasing
the tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds, then stop and
listen for a single horn chirp. The single horn chirp
should sound within 15 seconds, confirming that the
sensor identification code has been matched to
this tire and wheel position. If you do not hear the
confirming single horn chirp, you will need to start
over with step number one. To let air-pressure out of
a tire you can use the pointy end of the valve cap,
a pencil-style air pressure gage or a key.
5-73
6. Proceed to the right (passenger’s side) front tire,
and repeat the procedure in step 5.
Federal Communications Commission and
Industry and Science Canada
7. Proceed to the right (passenger’s side) rear tire,
and repeat the procedure in step 5.
The TPM system operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry and Science Canada.
8. Proceed to the left (driver’s side) rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in step 5.
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the left
rear tire, check to see if the TPM warning light is
still flashing. If yes, turn the ignition switch to OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Certification/Tire label or
the Tire and Loading Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems
The spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. If you
replace one of the road tires with the spare, the CHECK
TIRE PRESSURE message will be displayed on the
DIC screen. This message should go off once you
re-install the road tire containing the TPM sensor.
The SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message is displayed
when the TPM system is malfunctioning. One or more
missing or inoperable TPM sensors will cause the
service tire monitor message to be displayed.
See your dealer for service.
5-74
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-76 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-79 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,
use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-83.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
for more information. Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-120.
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, the sensors will need to be reset after a
tire rotation is performed. See “TPM Sensor
Identification Codes” under Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 5-72.
{CAUTION:
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loading
information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-58 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-71,
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a Flat
Tire” in the Index.
5-75
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-76
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need,
look at the Certification/Tire label or the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-58, for more information about these labels
and where they can be found on your vehicle.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a
Tire Performance Criteria Specifications (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same TPC
Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to
have tires that are designed to give proper endurance,
handling, speed rating, load range, traction, ride, tire
pressure monitoring system performance and other
things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires
have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be
followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
Whenever you replace your tires with those not having
a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction
type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
If you replace your vehicle’s tires with those not having
a TPC Spec number, the tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low pressure warning.
Non-TPC Spec tires may give a low pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec numbered tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a different
size spare than the road tires (those originally
installed on your vehicle). When new, your
vehicle included a spare tire and wheel
assembly with a similar overall diameter as
your vehicle’s road tires and wheels, so it is
all right to drive on it. Because this spare was
developed for use on your vehicle, it will not
affect vehicle handling.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-77
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-78
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
5-79
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
5-80
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-83 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause a crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P265/75R16, LT265/75R16,
P265/70R16 or P265/70R17 size tires, don’t use
tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there’s not enough clearance. Tire
chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to
the brakes, suspension or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire chains could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle and
you or others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
Notice: If you have a tire size other than P265/75R16,
LT265/75R16, P265/70R16 or P265/70R17 use tire
chains only where legal and only when you must.
Use chains that are the proper size for your tires.
Install them on the rear tires only.
Don’t use chains on the front tires.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels
with chains on will damage your vehicle.
5-81
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
5-82
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
{CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the
other side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
5-83
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
Tahoe (Rear Access Panel)
A. Tool Kit with Jack
Tools and Gloves
B. Retaining Bracket
and Wing Nut
5-84
C. Wing Nut Holding
Tire Blocks
D. Tire Blocks
E. Bottle Jack
Suburban
A. Bottle Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut Holding
Tire Blocks
D. Mounting Bracket
E. Removable Tray
F. Retaining Hook
G. Retaining Bracket
and Wing Nut
H. Tool Kit with Jack
Tools and Gloves
For Tahoe, the equipment is located behind the left trim
panel in the rear of the vehicle. Unlatch the release
lever to open the trim panel door. Skip the first step and
follow the last three.
You’ll use the jack handle extensions and the wheel
wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.
For Suburban, the equipment you’ll need is under the
storage tray in the left trim panel.
1. Remove the tray to access the tools.
2. There is a wing nut used to retain the tool kit.
To remove it, turn the wing nut counterclockwise.
3. To release the bottle jack from its holder, turn the
knob on the bottle jack counterclockwise to lower
the jack head.
4. The wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer can
be removed by turning the wing nut
counterclockwise.
A. Spare Tire (Valve
Stem Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extensions
J. Hoist Lock
(If Equipped)
5-85
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a hoist lock (J),
open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper
and use the ignition key to remove the lock.
2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H) and the two jack
handle extensions (I) as shown.
3. Insert the hoist end
(open end) (F) of the
extension through
the hole (G) in the
rear bumper.
Be sure the hoist end of the extension connects to
the hoist shaft (E). The ribbed square end of the
extension is used to lower the spare tire.
4. Turn the wheel wrench (H) counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to
turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
not to lower. See “Secondary Latch System” later
in this section.
5-86
5. The wheel wrench has
a hook that allows you
to pull the hoist
cable towards you to
assist in reaching
the spare tire.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
Use the following pictures and instructions to remove
the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
6. When the tire has
been lowered, tilt the
retainer (D) at the
end of the cable so
it can be pulled
up through the wheel
opening.
The tools you’ll be using include the bottle jack (A), the
wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle
extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-87
1. Remove the center cap by placing the chisel end
of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and
gently prying the cap out.
2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen
the wheel nuts. Don’t remove the wheel nuts yet.
Notice: If your vehicle has QUADRASTEER™ and
you use a jack to raise the vehicle without
positioning it correctly, you could damage the
QUADRASTEER™ system. When raising your
vehicle on a jack, avoid contact with tie rods and
tie rod boots.
5-88
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only
by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Jacking Locations (Overall View)
A. Front Position
B. Rear Position
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5-89
3. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown.
Rear Position 1500
Series
Front Position
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of
the vehicle, you’ll need to use the jack handle (C)
and only one jack handle extension (D). Attach
the wheel wrench to the jack handle extension.
Attach the jack handle to the jack. Position the jack
on the frame behind the flat tire where the frame
sections overlap. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise
to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough
off the ground so there is enough room for the spare
tire to clear the ground.
5-90
Rear Position 2500
Series
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the
vehicle, you’ll need to use the jack handle (C)
and both jack handle extensions (D). Attach the
wheel wrench to the jack handle extensions. Attach
the jack handle to the jack. Use the jacking pad
provided on the rear axle. Turn the wheel wrench
clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle
far enough off the ground so there is enough room
for the spare tire to clear the ground.
4. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
5. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all the rust or dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
5-91
6. After mounting the
spare, put the wheel
nuts back on with
the rounded end of
the nuts toward
the wheel. Tighten
each wheel nut
by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to
tighten the nuts until
the wheel is held
against the hub.
8. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as
shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise.
7. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.
CAUTION:
5-92
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you have to replace them, be sure to get
new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See “Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See “Capacities and
Specifications” in the index for the wheel nut
torque specification.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall the center cap. Place the cap on the
wheel and tap it into place until it seats flush with the
wheel. The cap only goes on one way. Be sure to
line up the tab on the center cap with the indentation
on the wheel.
5-93
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire,
Jack and Tools
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire
carrier. Use the art and text following to help you:
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time
or with the valve stem pointing up may damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem
pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired
as soon as possible.
5-94
A. Spare Tire (Valve
Stem Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extensions
J. Hoist Lock
(If Equipped)
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down, and to the rear.
2. Tilt the retainer (D)
downward and through
the wheel opening.
Make sure the retainer
is fully seated across
the underside of
the wheel.
4. Insert the hoist end (F)
through the hole (G) in
the rear bumper and
into the hoist shaft.
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the
retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice.
You cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) and extensions (I)
together.
5-95
To store the tools, follow these procedures:
For Tahoe, do the following:
1. Put the tool kit, with the jack tools and gloves,
in the tool bag and place in the retaining clip
above the jack.
2. Tighten down with the wing nut.
3. Then, assemble wheel chocks and bottle jack
together with the wing nut and retaining hook.
4. Position behind the jack storage cover in the left
rear side panel and tighten, adjusting clockwise
until the jack is secured tight in the mounting
bracket. Be sure to position the holes in the base
of the jack onto the pin in the mounting bracket.
For Suburban, do the following:
A. Push and Pull
B. Rotate Tire
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire
moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
Reinstall the spare tire lock (if equipped).
5-96
1. Return the tool kit (jack tools and gloves) to the
tool bag.
2. Assemble wheel chocks and bottle jack together
with the wing nut and retaining hook.
3. Position under the jack storage tray in the left rear
side panel below the wheelbase and tighten,
adjusting clockwise until the jack is secured tight
in the mounting bracket. Be sure to position the
holes in the base of the jack onto the pin in
the mounting bracket.
4. Use the retaining clip to fasten the tool kit on the
stud in the storage compartment in the rear left
trim panel and turn the wing nut clockwise to
secure.
5. Return the storage tray.
Suburban
Tahoe (Rear Access Panel)
A. Tool Kit with Jack
Tools and Gloves
B. Retaining Bracket
and Wing Nut
C. Wing Nut Holding
Tire Blocks
D. Tire Blocks
E. Bottle Jack
A. Bottle Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut Holding
Tire Blocks
D. Mounting Bracket
E. Removable Tray
F. Retaining Hook
G. Retaining Bracket
and Wing Nut
H. Tool Kit with Jack
Tools and Gloves
5-97
Secondary Latch System
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch
do the following:
Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It’s designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the
spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing
down. See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire, Jack and Tools”
earlier in this section.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end is
visible.
2. If the cable is not visible proceed to Step 6.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten
the cable.
5-98
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 5 of “Removing the Spare Tire and Tools”
earlier in this section.
7. Place the bottom edge of the jack on the wheel
blocks, separating them so that the jack is
balanced securely.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately six inches (15 cm) of cable is
exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks
on their shortest ends,
with the backs
facing each other.
5-99
11. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack completely,
make sure no one is behind you or on either
side of you as you pull the jack out from the
spare.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle towards the front of the
rear bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack
under the center of the spare tire.
9. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
10. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire
stops moving upward and is held firmly in place.
The secondary latch has released and the spare tire
is balancing on the jack.
5-100
12. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the
hoist handle, extension and wheel wrench into
the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the
wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare
the rest of the way.
13. Tilt the retainer at the
end of the cable and
pull it through the
wheel opening. Pull the
tire out from under
the vehicle.
14. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn the
wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper
clockwise to raise the cable back up.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, see “Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire” earlier in
this section.
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-71 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-83.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than
the road tires, those originally installed on your vehicle.
This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle,
so it is all right to drive on it. If your vehicle has
four-wheel-drive and the smaller spare is installed,
keep the vehicle in two-wheel-drive mode as much
as possible.
5-101
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you
strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle.
Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in
a closed space. When you use anything from a
container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always
open your doors or windows when you are cleaning
the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
5-102
Do not use any of these unless this manual says you
can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric
and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains
very well.
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-109.
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can — before they
set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaning instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat
the area with a water and baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Do not saturate
the material and do not rub it roughly.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
5. As soon as you have cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
5-103
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do this more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you do not get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap
or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then,
let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
5-104
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument
Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through
the windshield under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-109.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle
well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-109.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with QUADRASTEER™
see QUADRASTEER™ on page 4-17.
5-105
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-109.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
5-106
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Cleaning the Windshield, Backglass
and Wiper Blades
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Your vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
5-107
Cleaning Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas of
finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s
body and paint shop.
5-108
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches and
Swirl Remover Polish
other light surface
contamination.
Removes light scratches
Cleaner Wax
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines and
Foaming Tire Shine
protects in one easy step,
Low Gloss
no wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
Wash Wax Concentrate
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
Spot Lifter
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
Odor Eliminator
fabrics, vinyl, leather
and carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13.
5-109
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
You’ll find this label located in the glove box. It’s very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
•
•
•
•
Your VIN
The model designation
Paint information
A list of all production options and special
equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-86.
5-110
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block access
door is on the driver’s side
edge of the instrument
panel. Pull off the cover to
access the fuse block.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between
your thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse block
access door. These can be used to replace a bad
fuse. However, make sure it is of the correct amperage.
5-111
Fuses
Usage
RR Wiper
Rear Window Wiper Switch
SEO ACCY
Special Equipment Option
Accessory
WS WPR
Windshield Wipers
5-112
Fuses
Usage
TBC ACCY
Truck Body Controller
Accessory
IGN 3
Ignition, Heated Seats
4WD
Four-Wheel Drive System,
Auxiliary Battery
HTR A/C
Climate Control System
LOCK
Power Door Lock Relay
(Lock Function)
HVAC 1
Inside Rearview Mirror,
Climate Control System
L DOOR
Driver’s Door Harness
Connection
CRUISE
Cruise Control
UNLOCK
Power Door Lock Relay
(Unlock Function)
RR FOG LP
Rear Fog Lamp (Export Only)
BRAKE
Anti-Lock Brake System
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Power Door Lock Relay
(Driver’s Door Unlock
Function)
BODY
Harness Connector
DRIVER UNLOCK
DDM
Driver Door Module
IGN 0
PCM, TCM
AUX PWR 2
Rear Cargo Area Power
Outlets
TBC IGN 0
Truck Body Controller
LOCKS
Power Door Lock System
VEH CHMSL
Vehicle and Trailer High
Mounted Stoplamp
ECC
Rear Electronic Climate
Control, Liftgate
LT TRLR ST/TRN
Left Turn Signal/Stop Trailer
TBC 2C
Truck Body Controller
LT TRN
Left Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
FLASH
Flasher Module
VEH STOP
Vehicle Stoplamps, Brake
Module, Electronic Throttle
Control Module
CB LT DOORS
Left Power Window Circuit
Breaker
TBC 2B
Truck Body Controller
RT TRLR ST/TRN
Right Turn Signal/Stop Trailer
TBC 2A
Truck Body Controller
RT TRN
Right Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
5-113
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Device
Usage
The center instrument panel utility block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
SL RIDE
Ride Control Harness
Connection
HDLR 2
Headliner Wiring Connector
BODY
Body Wiring Connector
DEFOG
Rear Defogger Relay
HDLNR 1
Headliner Wiring Connector 1
SPARE RELAY
Not Used
CB SEAT
Driver and Passenger Seat
Module Circuit Breaker
CB RT DOOR
Right Power Window Circuit
Breaker
SPARE
Not Used
INFO
Infotainment Harness
Connection
Device
Usage
SEO
Special Equipment Option
TRAILER
Trailer Brake Wiring
UPFIT
Upfitter (Not Used)
5-114
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block in the engine compartment
on the driver’s side of the vehicle near the battery.
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your
thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on its location.
5-115
5-116
*1 — Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail #2.
Fuses
Usage
STUD 2
Accessory Power/Trailer
Wiring Brake Feed
*4 — Gasoline Engine; Oxygen Sensors.
ABS
Anti-Lock Brakes
*5 — PCM Ignition
VSES/ECAS
Vehicle Stability
*2 — Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail #1.
*3 — Gasoline Engine; Oxygen Sensors.
Fuses
Usage
IGN A
Ignition Power
GLOW PLUG
Not Used
IGN B
Ignition Power
CUST FEED
Gasoline Accessory Power
LBEC 1
STUD #1
Auxiliary Power
(Single Battery and Diesels
Only)/Dual Battery (TP2)
Do not install fuse.
Left Bussed Electrical Center,
Left Doors, Truck Body
Controller, Flasher Module
TRL PARK
Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring
RR PARK
Right Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
MBEC
Mid Bussed Electrical Center
Power Feed, Front Seats,
Right Doors
LR PARK
Left Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
BLOWER
Front Climate Control Fan
PARK LP
Parking Lamps Relay
STARTER
Starter Relay
LBEC
Left Bussed Electrical Center,
Door Modules, Door Locks,
Auxiliary Power Outlet – Rear
Cargo Area and Instrument
Panel
INTPARK
Interior Lamps
STOP LP
Stoplamps
5-117
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
TBC BATT
Truck Body Controller
Battery Feed
PCM B
Powertrain Control Module,
Fuel Pump
SUNROOF
Sunroof
F/PMP
Fuel Pump (Relay)
SEO B2
Off-Road Lamps
B/U LP
Back-up Lamps, Automatic
Transmission Shift Lock
Control System
RR DEFOG
Rear Window Defogger
HDLP-HI
Headlamp High Beam Relay
PRIME
Not Used
SIR
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint System
4WS
Vent Solenoid Canister/
Quadrasteer Module Power
RR HVAC
Rear Climate Control
AUX PWR
Auxiliary Power
Outlet – Console
IGN 1
Ignition Relay
PCM 1
Powertrain Control Module
ETC/ECM
Electronic Throttle Control,
Electronic Brake Controller
FRT PARK
Front Parking Lamps,
Sidemarker Lamps
DRL
Daytime Running Lamps
(Relay)
IGN E
Instrument Panel Cluster,
Air Conditioning Relay,
Turn Signal/Hazard Switch,
Starter Relay
SEO IGN
Rear Defog Relay
TBC IGN1
Truck Body Controller Ignition
RTD
Ride Control
HI HDLP-LT
High Beam Headlamp-Left
TRL B/U
Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring
5-118
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
LH HID
Not Used
CRANK
Starting System
DRL
Daytime Running Lamps
LO HDLP-RT
Headlamp Low Beam-Right
Instrument Panel
Cluster/Driver Information
Center
FOG LP
Fog Lamp Relay
IPC/DIC
FOG LP
Fog Lamps
HVAC/ECAS
Climate Control Controller
HORN
Horn Fuse
CIG LTR
Cigarette Lighter
HORN
Horn Relay
HI HDLP-RT
High Beam Headlamp-Right
W/S WASH
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump Relay
HDLP-LOW
Headlamp Low Beam Relay
A/C COMP
Air Conditioning Compressor
W/S WASH
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump
A/C COMP
Air Conditioning Compressor
Relay
INFO
OnStar/Rear Seat
Entertainment
RR WPR
Rear Wiper/Washer
RADIO AMP
Radio Amplifier
RADIO
Audio System
RH HID
Not Used
SEO B1
Mid Bussed Electrical Center,
HomeLink, Rear Heated Seats
EAP
Electric Adjustable Pedals
TREC
All-Wheel Drive Module
LO HDLP-LT
Headlamp Low Beam-Left
SBA
Supplemental Brake Assist
BTSI
Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System
5-119
Capacities and Specifications
Please refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information. All capacities are
approximate.
Capacities and Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC™ 4800 V8
V
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 5300 V8
T
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 5300 V8
Z
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 6000 V8
U
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 8100 V8
G
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
Wheels and Tires
Model
C/K 1500
C/K 2500
Tire Pressure
Description
Torque
6 bolts (14 mm)
140 lb ft (190 Y)
8 bolts (14 mm)
140 lb ft (190 Y)
See the Certification/Tire label on the rear edge of the driver’s door or the
incomplete vehicle document in the cab.
After refill, the level must be rechecked. See Cooling System on page 5-31.
5-120
Cooling System Capacity
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
VORTEC™ 4800 V8 Automatic with front A/C
15.0 quarts
14.0 L
VORTEC™ 4800 V8 Automatic with front and rear A/C
17.0 quarts
16.0 L
VORTEC™ 5300 V8 Automatic with front A/C
13.0 quarts
12.0 L
VORTEC™ 5300 V8* Automatic with front and rear A/C
17.0 quarts
16.0 L
VORTEC™ 6000 V8 Automatic
13.0 quarts
12.0 L
VORTEC™ 6000 V8** Automatic with engine oil cooler
14.0 quarts
13.0 L
VORTEC™ 8100 V8 Automatic
20.0 quarts
18.0 L
Cooling System
*Vehicles equipped with the optional air conditioner.
**Vehicles equipped with the optional engine oil cooler.
Add one liter if equipped with rear heating for all engines.
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine oil so that the fluid is within the proper operating range.
See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
5-121
Capacities
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
VORTEC™ 4800 V8 VIN V
6.0 quarts†
5.7 L†
VORTEC™ 5300 V8 VIN T
6.0 quarts†
5.7 L†
VORTEC™ 5300 V8 VIN Z (E-85)
6.0 quarts†
5.7 L†
VORTEC™ 6000 V8 VIN U
6.0 quarts†
5.7 L†
VORTEC™ 8100 V8 VIN G
6.5 quarts†
6.1 L†
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank Capacity
Tahoe
26.0 gallons
98.4 L
Suburban (1500 Series)
31.0 gallons
117.3 L
Suburban (2500 Series)
37.5 gallons
140.0 L
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Capacity
Tahoe
Suburban
†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
5-122
2.71 lbs.
1.23 kg
3.0 lbs.
1.36 kg
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-8
Owner Checks and Services ..........................6-10
At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-10
At Least Once a Month .................................6-10
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-11
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-13
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-15
Maintenance Record .....................................6-17
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Introduction
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
6-2
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-58.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
See Off-Road Driving on page 4-23.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-4.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-8 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to get service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
CAUTION:
(Continued)
6-3
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-15. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on,
it means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the
next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life
system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary
for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench dealer has
GM-trained service technicians who will perform this work
using genuine GM parts and reset the system.
6-4
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for information on the
Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears,
certain services, checks and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message comes on within ten months
since vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II
was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on ten
months or more since the last service or if the message
has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-16. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary,
replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21. An Emission Control
Service. See footnote †.
•
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-62.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Vehicles without a filter restriction
indicator: Replace engine air cleaner
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 5-21. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
Four-wheel drive: Change transfer case
fluid. See footnote (g).
6-6
•
•
•
•
•
•
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service
Inspect evaporative control system.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnotes † and (k).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
•
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
•
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
•
•
Engine cooling system service
(or every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
•
6-7
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, transmission shift linkage and parking
brake cable guides. Ball joints should not be lubricated
unless their temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher,
or they could be damaged.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts,
signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant
velocity joints, rubber boots and axle seals for leaks.
6-8
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine
GM parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,
a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure
cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and
air conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken air bag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
(The air bag system does not need regular
maintenance.)
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
rear compartment hinges, outer liftgate handle pivot
points, rear door detent link, roller mechanism, liftgate
handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo
door hinge, locks and folding seat hardware. More
frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better and not stick or squeak.
(g) Add fluid as needed. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem; repair as needed. Check vent hose at transfer
case for kinks and proper installation.
(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-26 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, routing and condition.
Check that the purge valve works properly (if equipped).
Replace as needed.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
6-9
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
6-10
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-26 for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-62 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. Push, pull and then try to rotate or turn
the spare tire. If it moves, tighten it. See Changing a
Flat Tire on page 5-83.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-36 if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-36 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench dealer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but do not start the engine. Without
applying the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift
lever moves out of PARK (P), contact your GM
Goodwrench dealer for service.
6-11
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The key should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front of your
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.
6-12
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-16.
Usage
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM
Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-26.
Front Axle
(Four-Wheel
Drive)
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Front Axle
(All-Wheel
Drive)
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent.
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen
Fluid/Lubricant
SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052271,
in Canada 10950849).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
12378261, in Canada 10953455)
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
6-13
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
12378261, in Canada 10953455)
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
Hood Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Rear Axle
(Steerable)
Synthetic Axle Lubricant; use only
GM Part No. 12378557 (in Canada
88901362). Do not add friction
modifier.
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Transfer Case
(All-Wheel
Drive with
Stabilitrak®)
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Automatic
Transfer Case
(Four-Wheel
Drive)
AUTO-TRAK II Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378508,
in Canada 10953626).
Front Axle
Propshaft
Spline or
One-Piece
Propshaft
Spline
(Two-Wheel
Drive with
Auto. Trans.)
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879,
in Canada 10953511) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
GM 9985830.
6-14
Fluid/Lubricant
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.
12371287, in Canada 10953437).
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
VIN Code
V
T
Z
U
G
Oil Filter
25010633**
/PF44*
25010633**
/PF44*
25010633**
/PF44*
25010633**
/PF44*
89028862**
/PF454*
Engine Air
Cleaner /Filter
25313348**
/A1519C†
25313348**
/A1519C*†
25313348**
/A1519C*†
25313349**
/A1518C*
25313349**
/A1518C*
PCV Valve
—
—
—
—
—
Spark Plugs
12571164**
/41–985*
12571164**
/41–985*
12571164**
/41–985*
12571164**
/41–985*
12578277**
/41–983*
Fuel Filter
25121792**
/GF626*
25121792**
/GF626*
25121792**
/GF626*
25121792**
/GF626*
25121792**
/GF626*
Wiper Blades
(Front)
15153642**
15153642**
15153642**
15153642**
15153642**
Wiper Blade Type
(Front)
ITTA
ITTA
ITTA
ITTA
ITTA
6-15
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts (cont’d)
VIN Code
V
T
Z
U
G
Wiper Blade
Length (Front)
22 inches
(56.0 cm)
22 inches
(56.0 cm)
22 inches
(56.0 cm)
22 inches
(56.0 cm)
22 inches
(56.0 cm)
Wiper Blades
(Rear)
22121329**
22121329**
22121329**
22121329**
22121329**
Wiper Blade Type
(Rear)
ITTA
ITTA
ITTA
ITTA
ITTA
Wipe Blade
Length (Rear)
14 inches
(35.0 cm)
14 inches
(35.0 cm)
14 inches
(35.0 cm)
14 inches
(35.0 cm)
14 inches
(35.0 cm)
*ACDelco® part number
**GM part number
†A1518C high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
††Spark Plug Gap is 0.040 inches (1.01 mm).
6-16
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10 can be added on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ..................................................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Records ....................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-11
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court
program administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding
vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program
prior to filing a court action, use of the program is
free of charge and your case will generally be heard
within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision
given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with
any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. You can find your specific vehicle information
all in one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual. (United States only)
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members. (United States only)
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States – Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA® (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada – Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
7-4
Overseas – Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) – Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your vehicle
(hand controls, wheelchair/
scooter lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The offer is available for
a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your
vehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call the
GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. (The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.)
Security While You Travel
1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
As the proud owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Chevrolet’s Roadside
Assistance toll-free number is staffed by courteous
and capable Roadside Assistance Representatives
who are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles.
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership
for warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance when the
vehicle is mired in sand, mud or snow.
7-6
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
•
•
•
•
Telephone number of your location
Location of the vehicle
Model, year, color, and license plate number
Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number and delivery
date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you and
your family. Remember, we are only a phone call away.
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-234-8872), text telephone (TTY) users, call
1-888-889-2438.
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Chevrolet’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency or
type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Buick reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value
in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with
the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
7-7
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement (five day maximum) may be available
for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus.
In addition, should you arrange transportation through
a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable
fuel expenses (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
you obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of
$30.00 a day and must be supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or
rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
7-8
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact you dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Records
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash or near crash
event by computer systems commonly called event data
recorders (EDR).
In a crash or near crash event, computer systems, such
as the Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in
your vehicle may record information about the condition
of the vehicle and how it was operated, such as engine
speed, brake applications, throttle position, vehicle
speed, seat belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance data, and the severity of a collision.
This information has been used to improve vehicle
crash performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
7-9
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the SDM is required.
GM will not access information about a crash event or
share it with others other than
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or SDM.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar, please check
the OnStar subscription service agreement or manual for
information on its operations and data collection.
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Service Manuals
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
7-11
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-12
A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-21
Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-40
Additional Program Information ........................... 7-9
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-5
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-110
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-23
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade) .................. 3-80, 3-84, 3-96, 3-111
After Off-Road Driving ..................................... 4-38
Air Bag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-42
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-42
Air Bag Systems ..................................... 1-72, 1-78
Adding Equipment to Your
Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 1-86
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-79
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-82
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-86
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-79
What Will You See After an
Air Bag Inflates? ...................................... 1-80
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-77
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-75
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-21
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-31
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ......... 7-9
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-51
All-Wheel Drive with Stabilitrak® ........................ 2-33
AM ............................................................. 3-138
AM-FM Radio ................................................. 3-78
Antenna, Fixed Mast ...................................... 3-140
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System ..................................................... 3-140
Anti-lock Brake System ..................................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-46
Appearance Care .......................................... 5-102
Care of Safety Belts ................................... 5-105
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-108
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-102
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ............ 5-105
Finish Damage .......................................... 5-108
Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-108
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-108
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-109
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-105
Approaching a Hill .......................................... 4-30
Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-21
Audio Output ................................................ 3-132
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-76
AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-78
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-137
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-138
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-140
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-139
Chime Level Adjustment ............................. 3-140
Fixed Mast Antenna ................................... 3-140
1
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-92
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-81
Radio with Six-Disc CD .............................. 3-108
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 3-135
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS) ....................... 3-77
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS) ....................... 3-77
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-137
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-138
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-140
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation .......... 2-43, 2-45
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-15
Automatic Level Control ................................... 4-64
Automatic Transfer Case .................................. 2-29
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-23
Operation ................................................... 2-25
Autoride™ ..................................................... 4-64
Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp Switch ................. 3-18
B
Backing Up .................................................... 4-75
Battery .......................................................... 5-44
BATTERY NOT CHARGING ............................. 3-69
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-6
2
Battery Run-Down Protection ............................ 3-20
Battery Warning Light ...................................... 3-44
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-45
Before You Drive ........................................... 3-123
Before You Go Off-Roading .............................. 4-25
Bench Seat .................................................... 1-16
Bench Seat Split (50/50) .................................. 1-12
Bench Seat, Split (60/40) ................................. 1-10
Brake
Parking ...................................................... 2-36
System Warning Light .................................. 3-45
Brake Adjustment ............................................ 5-44
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-41
Brake Pedal, Throttle ....................................... 2-23
Brake Pedal Travel ......................................... 5-44
Brake Wear ................................................... 5-43
Brakes .......................................................... 5-41
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-9
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-20
Bucket Seats, Rear ......................................... 1-21
BUCKLE PASSENGER .................................... 3-69
BUCKLE SEATBELT ....................................... 3-69
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-55
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps ........................... 5-56
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-55
Headlamps ................................................. 5-55
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-60
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Roof Marker Lamps .....................................
Side Identification Marker Lamps ...................
Taillamps ....................................................
Buying New Tires ...........................................
5-58
5-57
5-59
5-76
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-7
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-120
Car Washes for QUADRASTEER™ Equipped
Vehicles ..................................................... 4-19
Carbon Monoxide ................... 4-48, 4-65, 2-13, 2-40
Care of
Safety Belts .............................................. 5-105
Your Cassette Tape Player .......................... 3-138
Your CD and DVD Player ........................... 3-140
Your CDs and DVDs .................................. 3-139
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-59
Cargo Tie Downs ............................................ 2-59
Cassette Tape Messages ............................... 3-104
CD Adapter Kits ............................................ 3-104
CD Messages ............................. 3-92, 3-107, 3-122
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-57
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................ 5-114
Center Passenger Position, Safety Belts ............. 1-37
Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-81
CHANGE ENGINE OIL .................................... 3-69
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-50
Check Engine Light ......................................... 3-50
CHECK OIL LEVEL ......................................... 3-70
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE ............................... 3-70
CHECK WASHER FLUID ................................. 3-70
Checking Brake Fluid ...................................... 5-42
Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-28
Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-16
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................... 1-87
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-108
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-51
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-48
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-60
Older Children ............................................. 1-45
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ................................... 1-62
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center
Rear Seat Position ................................... 1-65
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position ............................... 1-62
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-67
3
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-68
Top Strap ................................................... 1-56
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-57
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-54
Chime Level Adjustment ................................. 3-140
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-21
Cleaning
Inside of Your Vehicle ................................. 5-102
Outside of Your Vehicle .............................. 5-105
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-108
Video Screen ............................................ 3-140
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-105
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..... 5-107
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ...................... 5-106
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet ................................... 5-102
Cleaning Glass Surfaces ................................ 5-104
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ............... 5-104
Cleaning Leather ........................................... 5-104
Cleaning the Mirror ................................. 2-44, 2-47
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ......... 5-104
Cleaning the Windshield, Backglass and
Wiper Blades ............................................ 5-107
Cleaning Tires .............................................. 5-108
Cleaning Vinyl .............................................. 5-104
Climate Control System ................................... 3-22
Dual .......................................................... 3-23
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-27
4
Climate Control System (cont.)
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ......... 3-35
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System,
Electronic ................................................ 3-37
Rear Air Conditioning System ........................ 3-34
Compass Calibration ............................... 2-44, 2-45
Compass Operation ......................................... 2-45
Compass Variance .................................. 2-43, 2-46
Content Theft-Deferrent .................................... 2-18
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-59
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-47
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-23
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-29
Cooling System .............................................. 5-31
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-54
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-57
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-12
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-10
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-16
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Defogging and Defrosting ......................... 3-25, 3-32
Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-10
Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-56
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3
Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-57
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-20
Door
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10
Locks .......................................................... 2-8
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-28
DRIVER DOOR AJAR ..................................... 3-70
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-56
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-56
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-68
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-39
City ........................................................... 4-43
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Freeway ..................................................... 4-44
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-46
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-40
Off-Road .................................................... 4-23
Winter ........................................................ 4-48
Driving Across an Incline .................................. 4-35
Driving Downhill .............................................. 4-34
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice .................... 4-37
Driving in Water .............................................. 4-38
Driving On Grades .......................................... 4-76
Driving on Off-Road Hills ................................. 4-30
Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-48
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-42
Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-42
Driving Uphill .................................................. 4-31
Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-74
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-27
Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-23
5
DVD
Cleaning the Video Screen ..........................
Distortion ..................................................
Rear Seat Entertainment System ..................
DVD Player ..................................................
3-140
3-138
3-123
3-123
E
Easy Exit Seat ............................................... 2-62
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-110
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-111
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-111
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-111
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs ................................. 3-52
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-21
Battery ....................................................... 5-44
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-50
Coolant ...................................................... 5-26
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-23
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-47
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-40
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-38
Oil ............................................................. 5-16
Overheating ................................................ 5-29
Starting ...................................................... 2-22
6
ENGINE COOLANT HOT ................................. 3-70
Engine Hour Meter Display ............................... 3-41
Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-19
ENGINE OVERHEATED .................................. 3-70
Entertainment System
Cleaning the Video Screen .......................... 3-140
DVD Distortion .......................................... 3-138
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-19
Environmental Concerns .................................. 4-27
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons .............................. 2-56
Event Data Records (EDR) ................................ 7-9
Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-19
Express-Down Windows ................................... 2-16
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-44
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-14
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-21
Finding a Program Type (PTY)
Station (RDS and XM™) ............. 3-85, 3-97, 3-112
Finding a Station .................. 3-78, 3-83, 3-95, 3-110
Finish Care .................................................. 5-106
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-108
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................... 3-140
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-82
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-83
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-23
Power Steering ........................................... 5-38
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-40
FM Stereo .................................................... 3-138
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-17
Folding the Seatback ....................................... 1-16
Folding the Seatbacks ..................... 1-10, 1-12, 1-21
Following Distance .......................................... 4-75
Four-Wheel Drive .................................... 2-28, 5-53
Four-Wheel-Drive Light .................................... 3-54
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-54
Front Axle Locking Feature ............................... 2-28
Front Reading Lamps ...................................... 3-19
Front Storage Area ......................................... 2-57
Frontal Air Bags ............................................. 1-77
Fuel ............................................................... 5-4
Additives ...................................................... 5-5
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
E-85 (85% Ethanol) ....................................... 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-8
Gage ......................................................... 3-55
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-4
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-55
Fuel Information Button .................................... 3-59
FUEL LEVEL LOW ......................................... 3-71
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-111
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-111
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-47
Fuel .......................................................... 3-55
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-53
Speedometer .............................................. 3-41
Tachometer ................................................. 3-41
Transmission Temperature ............................. 3-48
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-44
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-53
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-4
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Gate Operator and Canadian Programming ........ 2-55
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving ................ 4-28
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-57
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .................................................... 7-5
7
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-8
Headlamps .................................................... 5-55
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-55
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps ........................... 5-56
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-55
Roof Marker Lamps ..................................... 5-58
Side Identification Marker Lamps ................... 5-57
Headphones ................................................. 3-130
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-5
Heating ......................................................... 3-31
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-46
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-46
Hitches .......................................................... 4-72
HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-53
HomeLink® Transmitter, Programming ................ 2-53
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-7
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank ................................................. 5-34
How to Add Fluid ............................................ 5-26
8
How to Check ........................................ 5-24, 5-71
How to Check Lubricant ................................... 5-52
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-39
How to Inspect ............................................... 5-22
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-28
Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-42
I
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-31
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-30
If the Light is Flashing ..................................... 3-51
If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-51
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard ......................... 4-50
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-52
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer ..................... 4-66
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-21
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-48
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-71
Instrument Panel
Cluster ....................................................... 3-40
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-19
Instrument Panel Fuse Block .......................... 5-111
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-19
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-45
K
KEYFOB X BATTERY LOW ............................. 3-71
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Lamps
Exterior ......................................................
Interior .......................................................
Lamps On Reminder .......................................
Lap Belt ........................................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...........................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ...................................
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running ..........................................
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR ................................
Level Control ..................................................
Liftgate ..........................................................
Liftgate Glass and Liftgate ................................
3-14
3-19
3-16
1-38
1-28
1-60
1-62
2-38
3-71
4-64
2-13
2-14
Light
Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-42
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-46
Battery Warning .......................................... 3-44
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-45
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-54
Four-Wheel-Drive ......................................... 3-54
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-55
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-50
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator ................ 3-42
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-41
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-49
Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 3-54
Traction Off ................................................ 3-46
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror ............................... 2-17
Listening to a DVD .............................. 3-107, 3-122
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-58
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving .......... 4-26
Locking Rear Axle ........................................... 4-11
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-13
Lock-Out Switch ............................................. 2-17
Locks
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10
Door ........................................................... 2-8
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-13
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-22
9
LOW COOLANT LEVEL .................................. 3-71
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-55
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-57
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-5
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-10
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-10
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-11
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-8
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-17
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-15
Owner Checks and Services ......................... 6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-13
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using Your ................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-77
Making Turns ................................................. 4-75
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-50
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-3
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-16
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-6
10
Memory Seat ................................................. 2-61
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-68
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/
Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass
and Temperature Display ........................... 2-44
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®,
Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-42
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-42
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-49
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors ........................ 2-47
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-50
Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors ................... 2-50
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-50
Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-47
Outside Power Camper-Type ......................... 2-48
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .................... 2-48
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-48
Model Reference ................................................ vi
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-20
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-15
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-41
Off-Road Driving ............................................. 4-23
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-20
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-16
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-53
OIL LIFE RESET ............................................ 3-71
OIL PRESSURE LOW ..................................... 3-71
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-45
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® Personal Calling ................................. 2-52
OnStar® Services ............................................ 2-51
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 2-52
OnStar® System ............................................. 2-51
OnStar® Virtual Advisor .................................... 2-52
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ................................... 3-26, 3-33
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-49
Camper-Type Mirrors .................................... 2-47
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-50
Curb View Assist Mirrors .............................. 2-50
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-50
Manual Mirrors ............................................ 2-47
Power Foldaway Mirrors ............................... 2-48
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-48
Outside Power Camper-Type Mirror ................... 2-48
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
(V8 Engines Only) ....................................... 5-29
Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5
Owner Checks and Services ............................. 6-10
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-12
P
Panel Doors ................................................... 2-14
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-37
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-39
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-36
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-40
Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-76
Passenger Air Bag Indicator ..................... 2-44, 2-47
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator ................... 3-42
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR .............................. 3-72
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-82
Passing ................................................. 4-20, 4-75
Passlock® ...................................................... 2-20
Personalization Button ..................................... 3-61
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7
Playing a Cassette Tape ................................ 3-102
Playing a CD .............................. 3-90, 3-105, 3-117
Playing a Specific Loaded CD ......................... 3-118
11
Playing the Radio ................. 3-78, 3-82, 3-94, 3-109
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-21
Door Locks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System ....................................... 5-111
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-5
Seat ............................................................ 1-4
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-38
Windows .................................................... 2-16
Power Steering ............................................... 4-15
Power Winches .............................................. 4-82
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-10
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ........... 2-53
Q
QUADRASTEER™ .......................................... 4-17
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-27
R
Radio Data System (RDS) .............. 3-81, 3-93, 3-108
Radio Messages ............................. 3-80, 3-87, 3-99
Radios .......................................................... 3-76
AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-78
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-138
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-140
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-139
12
Radios (cont.)
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-92
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-81
Radio with Six-Disc CD .............................. 3-108
Rear Seat Audio ........................................ 3-135
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS) ....................... 3-77
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS) ....................... 3-77
Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-137
Understanding Reception ............................ 3-138
RDS Messages ............................. 3-86, 3-98, 3-114
REAR ACCESS OPEN .................................... 3-72
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ......... 3-35
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System
and Electronic Climate Controls ..................... 3-37
Rear Air Conditioning System ........................... 3-34
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-52
Locking ...................................................... 4-11
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-42
Rear Seat Audio Controls ............................... 3-135
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................. 3-135
Rear Seat Entertainment System ..................... 3-123
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-9
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions ............. 1-39
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-39
Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-59
Rear Window Defogger ............................ 3-25, 3-32
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-44
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature Display ..... 2-42
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-42
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-6
Reclining the Seatbacks ................................... 1-21
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-13
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-55
REDUCED ENGINE POWER ........................... 3-72
Remote Alarm .................................................. 2-6
Remote Control ............................................. 3-127
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5
Removing the 50/50 Split Bench Seat ................ 1-14
Removing the Bench Seat ................................ 1-19
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-87
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-84
REPLACE LIFTGATE FUSE ............................. 3-72
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-60
Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-44
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .............................................. 1-88
Replacing the 50/50 Split Bench Seat ................ 1-15
Replacing the Bench Seat ................................ 1-20
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects (cont.)
General Motors ........................................... 7-11
United States Government ............................ 7-10
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button ....... 2-56
Resetting Defaults ........................................... 2-56
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-87
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-88
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-87
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-88
Resynchronization ............................................. 2-7
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-21
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ......... 1-37
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR .............................. 3-72
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-53
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-41
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-41
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 5-105
Center Passenger Position ............................ 1-37
13
Safety Belts (cont.)
Driver Position ............................................ 1-28
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-28
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ........ 1-27
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ......................... 1-42
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-39
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-37
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-44
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-36
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-23
Safety Chains ................................................. 4-73
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scanning the Terrain ....................................... 4-28
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
50/50 Split Bench Seat ................................. 1-12
60/40 Split Bench Seat ................................. 1-10
Bench Seat ................................................ 1-16
Bucket Seats, Rear ...................................... 1-21
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-8
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-5
Manual ........................................................ 1-3
Memory ..................................................... 2-61
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-5
Power Seats ................................................. 1-4
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-9
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-6
14
Second Row .................................................. 1-65
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-98
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Seat Position ............................ 1-67
Center Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-65
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-62
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-62
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-68
Security While You Travel .................................. 7-6
Select Button ................................................. 3-68
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-50
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
SERVICE 4 WHEEL STEER ............................. 3-73
SERVICE 4WD ............................................... 3-73
SERVICE AIRBAG .......................................... 3-72
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM ............................. 3-73
Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-11
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-11
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL .............................. 3-73
SERVICE STABILITY ...................................... 3-73
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR ............................... 3-74
Setting Preset PTYs
(RDS Only) ............................... 3-86, 3-98, 3-113
Setting Preset Stations .......... 3-79, 3-83, 3-95, 3-110
Setting the Time
Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ............ 3-77
Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) ........ 3-77
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Treble) .................... 3-79, 3-84, 3-96, 3-111
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-108
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-37
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-39
Side Impact Air Bags ....................................... 1-78
Skidding ........................................................ 4-22
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-42
Spare Tire .................................................... 5-101
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems .................... 5-103
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-120
Speedometer .................................................. 3-41
Split Bench Seat (50/50) .................................. 1-12
Split Bench Seat (60/40) .................................. 1-10
Stabilitrak®, All-Wheel Drive .............................. 2-33
Stabilitrak® System ......................................... 4-12
STABILITY SYS ACTIVE .................................. 3-74
STABILITY SYS DISABLED .............................. 3-74
Stalling on an Incline ....................................... 4-36
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-22
Steering ........................................................ 4-15
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-16
Steering Tips .................................................. 4-15
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-137
Step-Bumper Pad ........................................... 4-82
Stereo RCA Jacks ......................................... 3-131
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-57
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-59
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-57
Front Storage Area ...................................... 2-57
Glove Box .................................................. 2-57
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-57
Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-59
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire,
Jack and Tools ............................................ 5-94
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-52
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-17
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-60
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-41
Taillamps ....................................................... 5-59
Temperature and Compass Display .................... 2-42
Temperature Display ........................................ 2-45
Testing the Alarm ............................................ 2-19
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-137
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-18
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-18
Passlock® ................................................... 2-20
Third Row ...................................................... 1-65
15
Throttle, Adjustable .......................................... 2-23
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP ...................................... 3-75
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7
Tilting the 50/50 Split Bench Seat ..................... 1-12
Tilting the Bench Seat ..................................... 1-17
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-49
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-62
Tire Size ....................................................... 5-66
Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-68
Tires ............................................................. 5-62
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-76
Chains ....................................................... 5-81
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-83
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-82
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-71
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-74
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-72
Spare Tire ................................................ 5-101
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-78
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-79
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-79
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-76
Entering or Exiting the Third Row Seats .............. 1-9
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-24
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-56
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-57
Torque Lock ................................................... 2-39
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-72
16
Tow/Haul Mode ............................................... 2-27
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................... 3-54
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-55
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-65
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-55
Traction
Assist System (TAS) ...................................... 4-9
Off Light ..................................................... 3-46
Stabilitrak® System ...................................... 4-12
TRACTION ACTIVE ........................................ 3-75
Traction Control Operation ................................ 4-13
TRACTION SYS LIMITED ................................ 3-75
Trailer
Recommendations ....................................... 4-65
Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-73
Trailer Wiring Harness ..................................... 4-78
Transfer Case ........................................ 5-51, 5-53
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-23
Temperature Gage ....................................... 3-48
TRANSMISSION HOT ..................................... 3-75
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-25
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual ............................................ 7-11
Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8
Traveling to Remote Areas ............................... 4-27
Trip Information Button .................................... 3-57
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-41
Turn and Lane Change Signals .......................... 3-8
TURN SIGNAL ON ......................................... 3-76
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-75
U
Underhood Fuse Block ................................... 5-115
Understanding Radio Reception ....................... 3-138
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-78
United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4
Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-80
Using Cleaner on Fabric ................................ 5-103
Using HomeLink® ........................................... 2-56
Using Song List Mode ................................... 3-120
Using the Recovery Hooks ............................... 4-53
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-6
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-58
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Records ............................................... 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-110
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-110
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat .............................................. 2-61
Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-45
Video Screen ................................................ 3-126
Visors ........................................................... 2-17
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-44
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-39
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-68
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washing Your Vehicle .................................... 5-105
Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches .......................................... 4-72
Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-68
Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-71
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-18
What to Add .................................................. 5-42
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-21
17
What to Use .......................... 5-27, 5-39, 5-40,
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..........................
Replacement ...............................................
When to Add Engine Oil ..................................
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System) ...................................
When to Check ..............................................
When to Check and Change ............................
When to Check Lubricant .................................
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................
When to Inspect .............................................
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill .........................................
Where to Put the Restraint ...............................
Why Safety Belts Work ....................................
Windows .......................................................
Manual ......................................................
Power ........................................................
18
5-52
5-79
5-79
5-17
5-20
5-71
5-23
5-52
5-39
5-21
4-77
1-54
1-24
2-15
2-16
2-16
Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-10
Fluid .......................................................... 5-40
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-61
Fuses ...................................................... 5-111
Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-48
X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-140
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(48 Contiguous US States) .................. 3-82, 3-93,
3-109, 3-138
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Download PDF